JP7366773B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 Publication

The gaming machine uses a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed in various displays such as an award amount display and a notification display. Furthermore, the gaming machine displays specific displays corresponding to various states, such as advantageous states, for example. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific character displays and specific displays .

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including a specific character display in relation to the specific display .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.);
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
A control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
The display means is
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state),
On the front side of the specific display, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 displays an acquisition number display regarding the number of award balls awarded on the front side of the background image). 20SHK, etc.)
On the front side of the specific display, a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that informs you that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches ``1000'', it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display ``over 1000''. and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over", etc.)
The grant amount display is a display that continues to be displayed even after a specific period of time has passed from the start of the display,
The notification display is a display that ends after the specified period of time has elapsed from the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the display). etc.),
The text display included in the notification display has a larger display size than the text display included in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK). size of characters, etc.),
The character displays included in the grant amount display and the notification display include a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character display is formed (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification The characters used in the display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.)
The specific display is not visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the award amount display (for example, the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.) ),
The specific display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the notification display,
The display means is
Start displaying the award amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first round game among the plurality of round games is started and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. ,
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed without displaying the predetermined display at the start of the award amount display,
Displaying the notification display while displaying the grant amount display (for example, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character display can be suitably displayed in relation to the specific display.
In order to achieve the above purpose, other gaming machines execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and provide advantageous information when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and includes a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and a display area of the display means is , a first display area, and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is 20SH51, and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means includes the first display area and the second display area 20SH52. In the two display areas, the background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded) on the front side of the background image in the second display area. , in the second display area 20SH52, an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image. , a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount; (For example, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot game on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquired number notification display 20SHKH that informs that the number of prize balls awarded in the state has reached the number of "Kiriban", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", "1000" It is possible to display a number-of-acquisition notification display that says "over", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2,000", it is possible to display a display that says "over 2,000". etc.), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state). etc.), and the notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has passed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of display). 20SHKH, etc.), and the characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are the acquisition number display 20SHK). The characters used for the amount display and the notification display include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed ( For example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed), the specific characters used in the award amount display, etc. , the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), and the background image is not visible from the specific area. The specific characters are such that the background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background video is visible from the specific area),
When displaying the award amount display, display the notification display (for example, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, etc.) ,
Furthermore, a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and an updating means that can update numerical information based on the variable display being executed ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the state control means includes a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. By doing so, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. I can do it.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the following means A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that can be controlled to a special state in which a variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-95449. For example, Patent Document 1 states that even if the number of times the special figure game is executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 1000 times (special number of times), when a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur, Conditions are met), the gaming state is controlled to be variable, the probability that a jackpot will be determined as a result of the special pattern game is increased to about 1/100, and jackpots are more likely to occur in subsequent special pattern games. It is stated that. Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, when a jackpot does not occur even when the number of special figure games (the number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 in a normal gaming state, a time saving state is generated instead of a variable probability state. It is stated that it can be used as a product.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there has been insufficient consideration of interest when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a special number, and during the period before and after that.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is rich in interest.

(Means A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game machine as shown in FIGS. 14-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. When the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in Figure 14-13, the game control As shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), the updating means updates the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-49 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that the special state control will be started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and (C2)). 14-53 (B), blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 14-54 (C), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 14-54 (C), etc.) The predetermined suggestion performance execution means further includes a performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means, in a period before the special condition is satisfied, The rate at which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 14-50).
According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the result display in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance period of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the performance operation example of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining count display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display is displayed in a fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning a prize occurs during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure showing an example of presentation operation when over winning occurs in characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over winning effect in the characteristic part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining time saving type. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing a specific example of production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting demonstration performance control processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each performance type of a look-ahead preview performance. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via relief. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a notice production execution decision table and a notice production mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a time-saving rush production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production. There is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in Modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of effects when executing a variable display that shortens rescue time in modification example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution determination table and a preview performance mode determination table in Example 2; 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Embodiment 2;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is comprised of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), etc., and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 at the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 at the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 at the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 at the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speaker portions 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR. There is. In addition, a general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g is provided in the vicinity of the general winning a prize opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is. In addition, these main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamps 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of acquired balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, which are lighting examples when all the game effect lamps 9 are turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state and time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation number counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a performance waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes in step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the end determination based on the count value of the number of special symbol variations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot release preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start time effect is not on standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the number of times the jackpot opening is opened counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the characteristic section 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type, but for example, if there is a jackpot type of "suddenly certain", a jackpot of "probable variable" or "non-probable variable" is set. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If in step 042AKS027 the game is waiting for the next release (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. The grand prize opening time which is the upper limit of the time for which the mouth is kept open is set. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after subtracting 1 and updating the game control process timer value (Step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value has been matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after the opening of the big winning hole. After updating the value to "6" corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stopping process shown in Figure 10-2, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission setting of various production control commands such as a winning start designation command, a big winning hole opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a big winning hole after opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing in step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), from the main board 11 side. A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls display that is the display of the number of balls acquired and the round number that indicates the number of rounds is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 to . When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. In some cases, the process of displaying "0015" even after winning a prize cannot keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set as 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before displaying the number of wins or the number of rounds, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light, regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as is, the count value of the number of acquired balls is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired and put out balls increases, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the n-th jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot, so the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings does not increase in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c emits light, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, displays a count-up display (notices that the winning number increases), and then displays the winning number to update the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042 AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the (n+1)th R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the (n+1) R is received (Step 042AKS065; Yes), "1" is added to n (Step 042AKS066), and various display processing is performed. end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and it is the second round, until the predetermined period has passed, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, the display timing of displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. and examples of performance operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 10-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 10-6). 5, step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in this order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting effect is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. Note that the small right-hitting display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in Figure 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up. 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the production effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, at the same time or with a time difference, such as in the downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period elapses, Figures 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, when the grand prize opening is completely opened as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R is started, and as shown in Figure 10-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time required for the counting switch 23 to detect the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after the game ball enters the grand prize slot as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), time passes without winning, 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown (the same applies to Figures 10-20, which will be described later). As shown in 10-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should hit to the right. The motion display of decorative patterns that make up a jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the player should hit the ball to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without the game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting up the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the maximum period in which the grand prize opening can be opened is reached. It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the 2nd R shown in FIG. 10-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the win is a win, the over-win sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 10-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 10-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot performance and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1R are shown. A display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 10-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (c-27). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. Moreover, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the second R predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (a-29). 10-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. Thereafter, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending performance. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win an additional prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after one round has started, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the production control CPU 120 directly specifies the winning number without displaying the number of wins of "0000" as a predetermined display. A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in Figure 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a fanfare performance indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, the production control CPU 120 controls the A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a grand prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the production control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second round and onwards.

Further, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel anxious, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the subsequent performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as it is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is finished, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , an example has been shown in which "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may only be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, regarding the display of the number of wins, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that description of parts similar to those in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the specified command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the big winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042 AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams illustrating display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 10-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. If time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball will be awarded a general prize. If a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, instead of displaying "0000", "0015" may be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is configured to provide the gaming value when the gaming medium enters the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating ``0015'', a display corresponding to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, after performing a count-up display that is a display indicating that the number of acquisitions will increase, ).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there has been a winning and the number of wins has increased.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may display a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. Start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after reception (for example, start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the big prize opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11 side is received) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is configured to lead the gaming medium to a winning path (for example, a large winning path) by being in the first state. By opening the winning slot door, the ejected game ball passes through the first route and is guided to the big winning slot, etc.), and by entering the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge route. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the launched game ball passes through a second route in the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge route) and a detection means (for example, count switch 23, etc.) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game medium, and the time from the route forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning opening door part is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the game enjoyment can be improved without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, the player Perform an operation promotion display to promote operation (for example, after a jackpot is achieved and until the jackpot is opened, a right-handed effect is performed as shown in Figure 10-7 (a-3), so that the game can be played. (e.g., displaying to the player that he or she should hit the ball with the right hand).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening has become completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to the completely open position, and the big winning opening door is in the completely open state. In response to detecting that the opening has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 may send a large prize opening specifying command.

According to this configuration, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the fired game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game ball is fired by performing a right-handed hit effect before the start of the first round). However, it is possible to win at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if the prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched between them (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball, as shown in FIG. 10-15). (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the player is stuck in the device 7 (more specifically, between the jackpot door and the glass door frame 3a), and the first round game when the jackpot game state is controlled again to the advantageous state. If the game medium in the sandwiched state wins a prize in the variable winning means by changing the variable winning means from the second state to the first state, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next jackpot occurs, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the first round, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests that the control has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare performance that suggests that the jackpot gaming state has entered the state until the big prize opening changes from the closed state to the open state) can be executed. At the same time as the display of the award amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins, and it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and,
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, (such as a CPU 103 that plays a round game), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value that is awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game) displaying a number, etc.), after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. The award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and the game medium enters the variable prize means within the predetermined period. If not, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is If the game medium wins within the variable prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.). , further comprising a light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means controls the game medium after the predetermined period has elapsed. Controlling the light emitting means in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium in the case where the winning means is won by the variable winning means and in the case where the game medium is won in the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period ( For example, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means is , the number of times of light emission per unit time is greater than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot performance The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the effect lamp 9 emits light per unit time (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above further includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is configured to operate when a game medium wins a prize in the variable prize winning means. A winning sound corresponding to a winning is output, and even if the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, or if the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the entered prize is output. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( (e.g., displaying the number of rounds obtained), it is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and the first round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the award amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened), and the number of rounds won is displayed after the second round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the grand prize opening is opened.) If the game medium does not enter the variable prize means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the elapsed time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is changed to the variable amount. When a prize is won by the prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are played, a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the game medium does not enter the variable prize winning means within the period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, If the game medium does not enter the grand prize hole within a predetermined period after the grand prize hole is opened, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31), if the game medium is not entered into the big prize hole, the information displayed in the previous round game will be displayed. within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the second and subsequent round games are played (such as continuously displaying the number of wins obtained). If the game medium wins in the variable winning means, the amount awarded according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added from the amount displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium enters the corresponding big prize slot within a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game will be changed to , the number of earned balls awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed), etc.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of a game medium in the variable winning means. After the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the updating display of the awarded amount display ends before the variable winning means returns to the first state again (for example, when the big winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over winnings may be completed within a period from when the prize is closed until the time when the prize is opened to the state corresponding to the second round.

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed when the first release is made does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed when the next release is made, so it is easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays content on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is the variable winning means. is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is better than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display is displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed so that more of the light emitting means emit light than when it is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) , in a situation where the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, but the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20). As shown in (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and during a predetermined period It is characterized by the fact that many production effect lamps 9 emit light, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed and improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform the operation is displayed. The light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c, etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable prize winning means is in the first state, the light emitting means before the predetermined period elapses. When the applied amount display is not displayed, the specified light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while causing the specific light emitting means to emit light, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the applied amount display is displayed. 10-7 (c-3), the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-9 (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are lit alternately, and the grand prize opening is opened. If the production effect lamps 9 are to be lit in sequence later to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off and remains lit as shown in Figure 10-9 (c-15). (e.g.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, in the round game, one of the round games ends when a certain number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened.) The time is sufficient for the game media to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the grand prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count from the elapse of the predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) period), etc.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is ensured for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one of the round games ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, when 10 game media are won). The period from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is the period when the game medium is in the second state. It is enough time to win a certain number of prizes (for example, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if you count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award after the predetermined period has elapsed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed, As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed. (e.g., causing the production effect lamp 9 to emit light from the scene).

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. A round game in which it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the following (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and the round game being executed can be identified at the same time as the display of the award amount display starts after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute an in-round performance corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, and performing a jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed), and at the same timing as the execution timing of the in-round performance. The light emitting means is caused to emit light at a timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance, etc.) , it may be done as follows.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10, etc.) in which game media can be won, and the display means It is possible to display the amount of gaming value awarded when a gaming medium is won in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning slot 10, an acquisition number display is displayed). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded), If a prize is won in the general winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the prize has been won in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened). If a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 in Good too.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side). The display means is capable of displaying a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the award amount display, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state. An effect is displayed at the same timing as the award amount display (for example, an effect display that moves decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is displayed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display For example, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot may be displayed in a manner suggesting a right-handed hit by moving them toward the back right, the front, and the back left.

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

(Explanation regarding the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is notified that the number of prize balls awarded has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are visible from the specific area during the jackpot background image.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the first form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating background technology related to the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the pachinko gaming machine may display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "points 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The number of acquired balls is displayed using numbers for displaying the number of prize balls and characters other than numbers for recognizing that the number of balls won is displayed. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The acquired number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) has the word "point" to remind you that it is a acquired number display, and the number "120" to display the number of prize balls. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by lines forming characters, and is an area that does not communicate with areas outside the lines forming characters. Here, ``not communicating with the area outside the lines forming the characters'' means that the ``specific area'' is completely isolated from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters'' by the ``lines forming the characters.'' In other cases, the ``specific area'' is not completely separated by the ``line forming the characters'' from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters,'' but it appears to be a separate area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character."

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is a substantially circular region surrounded by curved lines forming the characters. Two specific areas are formed for the Arabic numeral "8". In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by three straight lines forming the character.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The acquisition number display is displayed in a small size in the end area of the display area of the image display device that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during the jackpot. When the jackpot background image changes over time, the line of the jackpot background image may overlap with the back of the winning number display. If a specific character is displayed on the winning number display, the jackpot will appear on the back of the specific area of the specific character, like the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). When the lines of the medium background image overlap, the lines of the jackpot medium background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-1(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of the "butterfly" in the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of acquisitions. During the jackpot, the ``butterfly'' line in the background image is assimilated with the line forming the specific character ``0,'' making the specific character ``0'' look like the Arabic numeral ``8'' instead of the Arabic numeral ``0''.

In this way, if the characters in the acquired number display are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the jackpot background image so that the line of the jackpot background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH was created in view of this background. The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6" ”, “8”, and “9” specific areas 20SHI1 are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the characters is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, it is sufficient that the color of the specific area 20SHI1 has a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of prize balls and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the number of balls won are shown in Figure 11- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays an acquired number notification display to notify that fact.

Here, the time saving control and probability change control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state are such that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, or the jackpot game state is changed before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and probability changing control may be different for each type of jackpot, or in the case of a specific jackpot type, the number of times of time saving control and probability varying control may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. The accuracy control and time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state until a jackpot occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without intervening the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display to notify that fact. do.

The acquisition number notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is the acquisition number notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), a specific area of a specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is reached, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. Specific characters other than numbers for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2(B).

(How the number of acquisitions is displayed in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the jackpot is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can be recognized.

In addition to the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 also displays a jackpot display 20SHO to make the user recognize that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled, and a jackpot combination derived and displayed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A decorative pattern display 20SHZ showing the confirmed decorative pattern, a round number display 20SHR showing the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM indicating to the player that he should play right-handed are displayed. has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are also placed in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot, similar to the number of wins display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and acquisition number display. It may also include characters of a different type from the characters used for the number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters of the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH use "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Further, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In addition, the round number display 20SHR has "numbers" that are the same type of characters as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the characters that are different from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. Furthermore, the right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols" that are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of displaying the number of acquisitions and displaying the number of acquisitions notification.

In this embodiment, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A). A second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than 20SH51, is distinguished from each other to perform various displays. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays the background image during the jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4 (A), since "990 points" and the acquired number display 20SHK are displayed, it is easy to recognize that 990 game balls were paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the grand prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the production control CPU 120 changes the number of acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B) to (G). Count up by 1 until "1005". In that case, the number in the acquired number display 20SHK will go through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a round number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000," the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display saying "over 1000," and when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000," ”, a display indicating the number of acquisitions “over 2000” is displayed.

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1000" of Kiriban, the production control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification on the right end of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number displayed in each frame of the video while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005," the performance control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move it towards the left edge of the area.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is stopped when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and from that timing, the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of acquisitions has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to (H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0" which is a specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

Furthermore, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (D) to (H).

Note that the presentation mode when stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into the frame, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of displaying the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH in the frame, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may pop out from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, or the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may gradually come out. Alternatively, a character may appear and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of the effect of causing the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to go out of frame, it may be possible to create an effect in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. It may be an effect such that when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display a display indicating the number of obtained "over 2000". The acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during the jackpot to be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is not specified. If the jackpot background image is visible from a specific area of the character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but the jackpot background image is made invisible from the specific area of the specific character. This allows specific characters to be recognized accurately. In addition, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display 20SHK, but is displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the winner, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific letters. By doing so, it becomes possible to show even a little of the background image during the jackpot in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped from the winning number display 20SHK.

Furthermore, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and This includes characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM make the jackpot background image invisible from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, specific characters can be accurately recognized also in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and can frame the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is caused to frame out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the second form of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used in the win number notification display 20SHKH are more specific to the specific area relative to the area of the line forming the characters than the specific characters used in the win number display 20SHK. Portion size proportions are small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Obtainment number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the number of wins. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to pop out to the front. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 expressing the character and an area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D character and the size of the line area forming the 3D character. The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same size. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and the area located on the inner side thereof The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a modification example 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In the example shown in Figure 11-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison of non-3D characters and 3D characters in modification example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 1.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D characters and the size of the three-dimensional characters forming the 3D characters. The size of the line area 20SH31 representing the character is the same as that of the line area 20SH31. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the area of lines forming the character includes an area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, so the inner outline of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character and the characters on the inner side The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the area 20SHI4 becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character, than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of , and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In modification example 2, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area forming the character. The display is displayed in any one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations.

The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: "red" in the upper region 20SHSU, "orange" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: "orange" in the upper region 20SHSU, "yellow" in the center region 20SHSC, and "green" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: "yellow" in the upper region 20SHSU, "green" in the center region 20SHSC, and "light blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: "green" in the upper region 20SHSU, "light blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: "light blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "purple" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: "blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "purple" in the center region 20SHSC, and "red" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: "purple" in the upper region 20SHSU, "red" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the following order: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format A → ... are changed over time and displayed.

FIG. 11-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 2.

In modification example 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), there are cases when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moved (frame-in). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes is different depending on when the player is out of frame.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display is displayed while moving (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over a period of 0.35 seconds. , changes sequentially from display mode A to display mode D. Thereafter, the acquisition number display changes in order from display mode D to display mode G while being stopped and displayed for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Thereafter, while the acquisition number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over a period of 0.35 seconds, the display mode changes from display mode G to display mode C. Change.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000 pieces", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over". The acquired number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image of the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used to display the number of wins. The specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquisition number.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display, but the acquired number display is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the acquired number display is If the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Furthermore, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area representing the character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the acquisition number notification display.

Furthermore, as described above, the background image of the jackpot background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for displaying the winning number notification.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the player when he or she plays the game, and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, it is possible not only to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character even if the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, but also to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character. The production effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible during the jackpot from 20SHI3.

Further, as described above, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display in the first modification are such that the jackpot background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of is small, it is possible not only to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the jackpot background image cannot be seen from a specific area of a specific character, but also to make the jackpot background image invisible from a specific area of a specific character. By doing this, you can prevent characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the characters used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the second modification, the line area forming the characters is displayed in a three-color gradation. The image display device 5 then changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions to display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format. The display changes over time in the order of A→.... Then, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is moving (frame in/frame out), the number of acquisitions notification display changes. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation regarding the third form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko game machine 1 related to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used for displaying the result are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the third form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used to display results)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used in the result display in the third form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko game machine 1 finishes the round game of the final round, it executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background video. Furthermore, while displaying the ending background video, the image display device 5 displays a result display that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state.

The result display uses numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing that it is a result display. The numbers used for displaying the results are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used for displaying results, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a specific area of a specific character used for displaying a result is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-8, the specific areas 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are transparent. It is displayed in the display mode.

Among the characters used in the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers to recognize that it is a result display are also shown in Figure 11. The specific area is displayed in a transparent manner, as shown by the Arabic numeral 8.

(Various performances in jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of performance periods of various performances in the jackpot game state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of various performances in a jackpot game state.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an in-retention consecutive game notice indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot gaming state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state with all 10 rounds, the production control CPU 120 will control the performance control CPU 120 after 9 rounds of round games are completed and the final round game as shown in FIGS. At timing T1 when a round game of 10 rounds is started, a pending consecutive game notice is started.

When the on-hold consecutive game notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the round game is in progress in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B). During the jackpot, an effect image of the pending consecutive winnings preview will be displayed on the front side of the background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the pending multiplayer preview.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect video cannot be viewed from the specific area. Therefore, in a specific area, the "flame" line in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to (C), at timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 End the series preview and start the ending performance. When the ending effect is started, the ending background image is started to be displayed at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image in which a snowstorm of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen is displayed. Further, in front of the ending background image, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the on-hold series preview before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the ending background image may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. There may be cases where In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the cherry blossom snowstorm displayed as the ending background image is dancing across the screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at timing T3 to start displaying the result, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to a value lower than a predetermined brightness. It lowers the brightness to a certain dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the fluttering cherry blossoms have come to rest, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

Note that the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). Further, the result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(E), it is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting based on ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation mode of setting suggestion presentation using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value and to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of snowflakes fall from cherry blossom trees in full bloom on the left and right sides, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in Figure 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is high, the ending background image may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate. In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

Furthermore, the ending background video may have different performance modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when it is not the setting value "6". Further, the ending background video may have different effects depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or the setting value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned on-hold consecutive game notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game notice is not executed.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Furthermore, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot game state in accordance with the stored hold information in the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a preview of a pending consecutive play that suggests that the same will be played. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result display on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. Further, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive winnings preview from the specific area. On the other hand, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background video and the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive winnings notice, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background video. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, Because it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the preview, if the background video during the jackpot or the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive preview is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will appear to be a different character from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHE of a preview of consecutive games on hold invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and does not overlap with the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive show preview, so the ending background video can be viewed from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it becomes possible to show even a little of the ending background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive game preview is one of a plurality of types of preview presentations for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game preview is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect using the ending background video will be executed, the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is It increases.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than a predetermined brightness, and displays it at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness. Display result display 20SHRE.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH, there is a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probability variable state, and when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the remaining number of times are such that the background image during the ST is not visible from the specific area. The specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display are such that the background image during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic section 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-12 are diagrams illustrating background technology related to the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

Basically, if you compare states that are advantageous to the player, such as variable probability states, time-saving states, jackpot gaming states, etc., and normal states, pachinko gaming machines are more likely to play games in normal states than during periods in which players play games in advantageous states. It is designed to last for a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of reservation information is stored, when the upper limit number of reservation information is not stored. It is easier to execute a shortening variation in which the variable display time is shorter than the above. In the probability variable state with time saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, so winnings are more likely to occur than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period in which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period in which the game is played in the variable probability state with time saving control.

In probability variable control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either of the following conditions is met first: when the special figure game is executed for a predetermined number of STs, or when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot" It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control will end if the predetermined number of ST times of special symbol games are played. . Note that the predetermined number of times ST is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. Time-saving control is performed when either of the following conditions is met first: the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game state ends, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot". It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not result in a "jackpot" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control will end if the predetermined number of time saving games have been played. . Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

Note that the set value for the number of ST times and the set value for the number of time saving times may be different values.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled in the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the pachinko game machine may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), in response to the fact that the remaining number of ST times is 30, the remaining number of times "30 times remaining" is displayed.

For displaying the remaining number of times, numbers are used to display the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers are used to make it clear that the number of times remaining is displayed. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) has the characters "remaining" and "times" to remind you that it is a remaining number of times display, and "30" to display the remaining number of ST times. The numbers and are used.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, there are specific characters that form specific areas.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to be in a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that the screen appears to be cracked. The background image during ST is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the probability change state. The ST background image contains many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not obstruct the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap with the back of the remaining count display. When a specific character is displayed on the remaining count display, ST When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the ST middle background image are assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-12(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). In the examples shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the line of the ST background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of remaining times, and the ST background image line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters indicating the remaining number of times are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH was made in view of this background, and the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the character is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the remaining number of times are displayed are also shown in the diagram. As with the Arabic numerals 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display manner, which is different from the display manner of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-14 are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times notification in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display that notifies the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a plurality of types with different transmittances, as shown in FIGS. 11-14. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen from the line area.

Further, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 representing the character and an area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In a display mode where the background of the characters is transparent, the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, and in a display mode where the background of the characters is not visible, it is displayed as the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. The area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-14, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times are shown. 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display is different depending on whether the remaining number of times notification is displayed in a non-transparent manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the character, the area that represents the character The area surrounded by the inner outline of 20SHS71 and the outline of area 20SHS72A representing the depth of characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, so the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters is displayed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(How the remaining count display appears in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining count display looks in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-15(A).

In the examples shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image in ST overlaps with the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining count display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the ST middle background image, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays a number of wins display 20SHK, a right-handed hit display 20SHM, and a probability variation display 20SHRU for making it clear that the probability variation state is being controlled. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right hit display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU are also displayed in a small size in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative symbols, similarly to the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the same type of characters are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may also include characters of a different type than those shown in the text. In this embodiment, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH use "numbers", "hiragana", and "kanji" as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variation display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of character from the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquired number display 20SHK includes "numbers", which are the same type of characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, ``katakana,'' is used. In addition, the right-hand display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters used for the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH, and the remaining count display 20SHST and remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are characters of a different type from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-hand hit display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. Similar to the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining count display 20SHST, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU is also in a non-transparent display mode, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters are Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of production operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIGS. 11-17 are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of displaying the remaining number of times and displaying the remaining number of times notification in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays a remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) and (B), each time the variable display is executed, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number display 20 SHST. and display it.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) and (B), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times is started. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. For example, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the remaining number of times when a variable display is started in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17(B) to (D), the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display in which the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has elapsed after starting the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the production control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed after changing the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the performance control CPU 120, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of performing variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of ST times may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are provided. The total period including the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, In the first variable display, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information in at least the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the invisible remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the variable display time is the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. The variable display is set to end before the display result is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, The display result of variable display can be suitably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed to a transparent display mode. Since the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changing, the identification information in the background of the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In addition, in this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent manner when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent manner.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a variable probability state with time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 also provides a remaining number of times notification that notifies a predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 60, and the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 50. 50" remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be displayed. The remaining count display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST are such that the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 in the ST background image.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background video during the ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining ST count in a variable probability state, he or she checks the remaining count display 20SHST, but the remaining count display 20SHST is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the ST background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but the ST background image cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, specific characters can be recognized accurately. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is a predetermined number to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number. Since it is displayed only for a limited time and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific character, the first At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a small amount of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line portion forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, it is possible to avoid unnecessary stress on the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display a remaining number notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of decorative symbols can be made visible when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from decreasing due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display an award amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a display of the award amount of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52). (e.g., it is possible to display an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, the amount of game value awarded is a predetermined amount. As notification displays to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that informs you that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display will be displayed as "1000 over". (e.g., when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "over 2000"), the award amount display is The notification display is updated every time a gaming value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the number of acquisition display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot gaming state), and the notification display is The display is ended when a specific period of time has passed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is to end the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, etc.), and the notification is The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK and the number of acquisitions The characters used in the notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used in the display of the amount of application include the specific characters that form the background image from the specific area. is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display are not visible in the specific area. It is characterized in that the background image is visible from the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time, and large-sized characters are displayed in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, the first display area is It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image at a prominent display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6, 8, 9, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the amount of application and the notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the award amount display (for example, the image display device 5 When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the amount displayed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be able to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area; For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot background image, etc.) , the characters used for the specific display include the same type of characters as the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display, and the characters of a different type from the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display. , all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right hit display 20SHM). The characters include the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. 2 types of characters also include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the specific display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM mean that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area).

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even in the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and has a display means. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, (e.g., a second display area 20SH52 narrower than , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and in the second display area, the background image is displayed. (For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a display of the amount of the gaming value that has been awarded on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of prize balls acquired), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount; The displays include a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban"). When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", it is possible to display a win number notification display that says "over 1000", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", (e.g., when the number of award balls awarded reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over"), the award amount display is such that when the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", the award amount display is such that the gaming value is increased in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a game ball is awarded (for example, the number of acquisitions display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. (For example, the display notifying the number of acquisitions ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display.) The characters are larger in size than the characters used for display (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions), and the amount displayed and The characters used in the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include lines forming the characters). (e.g., a specific area surrounded by The specific characters used for the notification display are more similar to the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the award amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area is small (for example, the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions) than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. (e.g., the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area is small).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area for expressing characters and an area for expressing the depth of the characters.

According to such a configuration, the presentation effect of the notification display can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the jackpot may be visible from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the award amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period to bless people, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the lines forming the characters. Since the background image is small, it is possible to not only reduce the risk of misrecognizing the characters even if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also increase the production effect by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character. can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, in the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific characters used may be such that the background image is not visible during the jackpot from the specific area 20SHI4, etc.).

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the proportion of the size of the character is small, it is possible to not only suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character. This can prevent misunderstandings.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means is capable of changing the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 displays the number of acquired (such as that the notification display 20SHKH can be displayed by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51), and when the specific period has elapsed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change the mode to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into frame to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is made to frame out) etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line area forming the characters (for example, a modification example regarding the second form of the characteristic part 20SH). The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in 2 are displayed in a gradation of three colors in the line area forming the characters, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character format used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the following manner: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display mode G→display mode A→..., etc.), when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode, and when it is displayed in a different mode from the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of colors changes differs depending on when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 (for example, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is The display mode of the acquisition number notification display may change at a different speed depending on when the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out), etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state where the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device The display area of No. 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is , in the first display area and the second display area, a background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). , a background image during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation number display regarding the number of variations in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device 5 is that in the second display area 20SH52, a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state can be displayed on the front side of the ST background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, A frequency notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify the number of fluctuations when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of changes when the value of the number of changes display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first number of times notification display). 1 display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during ST, a remaining number display 20SHST is displayed as a remaining number display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``60'' when the number of remaining times shown by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``50'' when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times shown by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50 times. ), and the variable number display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). , the number of times notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends displaying when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying). The characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the number of fluctuations display (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are the same as those used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST). The characters used for the variable number display and the number notification display include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed ( For example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the variable number display include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc. The background video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background video is not visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI6), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are is characterized in that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH indicate that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the variation count display and the count notification display including the specific character in relation to the background image. For example, when checking the number of fluctuations in a special state, the player checks the fluctuation number display, but the fluctuation number display is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from a specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not displayed all the time like the fluctuating number of times display, but is displayed only during a specific period to alert players that the remaining number of times indicated by the fluctuating number of times display will reach a predetermined number of times. Since the characters are displayed in large size in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (12) above, the display means is capable of displaying the characters used for the number of times notification display in a transparent manner in which an image on the back side can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line part forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible when the number of times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine according to (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is displayed variably (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", In the variable display area, the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information (for example, , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be made visible while the number of times notification display is being displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 If the display result is derived and displayed, display it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while displaying the number of times notification display, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of the gaming value that has been provided (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls awarded), and displaying the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area where the award amount display is displayed (for example, an image display The device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from decreasing due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is configured to display information indicating that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a first background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and second display area 20SH52. (for example, the image display device 5 can display a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state at least in the first display area). In the first display area 20SH51, it is possible to display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that gives a suggestion regarding the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display a specific suggestion image in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background image is not displayed). , on the front side of the jackpot background image, it is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a pending consecutive game preview indicating that the jackpot game state will be controlled in accordance with the stored pending information, etc.), In the second display area, in the front side of the first background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, (e.g., it is possible to display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image during a jackpot), when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, On the front side of the second background image, it is possible to display a result notification display that informs the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display a result notification display when the ending background image is displayed). (e.g., it is possible to display a result display 20SHRE that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE). The characters used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed, etc.), and the specific character used for the display of the amount of application is determined from the specific area to the first background image and the previous period. The specific suggestion video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background video during the jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview are not visible from the specific area, etc.) The specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area 20SHI5). (e.g.).

According to such a configuration, the provision amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background video and the specific suggestion video, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the second background video. can be suitably displayed in relation to For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area, and the amount displayed is Since it may overlap with the suggested image, if the first background image or specific suggested image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character. By making the jackpot background image and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It becomes possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the prominent display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability (such as being able to set any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means. The second background video can be displayed in a manner that suggests the set value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion video is This is an aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion videos that make suggestions regarding the advantageous state, and do not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview predicts the reliability of the jackpot). Although this is one of multiple types of preview effects, setting suggestion effects based on pending continuous play notices should not be executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so the significance of the second background image being visible from the specific area of the specific character used for displaying the result notification. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image at a predetermined brightness). (such as starting display of an image), at the timing of starting display of the result notification display, the second background image is temporarily stopped and displayed at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and Display the result notification display at a brightness that is brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background video at a specific brightness that is lower than a predetermined brightness at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE) and displaying the result display 20SHRE at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 19SH will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH displays the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot gaming state, and the number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to display the expected number of balls to be acquired regarding the total number of balls awarded. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of wins invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected number of acquisitions display when the display of the expected number of acquisitions becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the display of the expected number of wins becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 19SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Production operation when a winning occurs during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation when a winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 12-2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions as 20SHK when the jackpot game state is controlled, and the game ball is placed in the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state. An acquired number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded by entering the game, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by the middle bracket "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator is "135/1500". It is displayed in the format of a fraction, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 having "1500" in the denominator. That is, the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 12-1(A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state is 135 balls, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 135 balls. This shows that the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded is 1,500.

Also in this embodiment, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the second display area 20SH52 includes a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and a round number display 20SHR. , the right-handed indication 20SHM is also displayed. Further, on the image display device 5, a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during the jackpot is displayed on a display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer where the winning number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the big prize opening in the jackpot game state, first, as shown in FIG. The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display has started at the lower right end of the display area is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2 (D) to (E). As a result, when the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When this happens, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been noticed has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-win occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game, the big winning hole is closed. A so-called over-win may occur in which the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of wins display 20SHK according to the performance mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first forms a big winning opening, as shown in FIGS. The effect display starts to be displayed in the display area near the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which has started displaying at the lower right end of the display area, is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the performance control CPU 120 controls the effect display 20SHEF to display the number of acquisitions 20SHK before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. To start an over-winning presentation that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning before it becomes invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as an over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-win sound different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-win effect. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound of "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the sound at the time of normal winning as an over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-4(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to view.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E). As a result, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in Figures 12-3 (D) to (E) and Figures 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display is The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. You can confirm that.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. By updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number is When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably make the user recognize that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-win occurs, not only the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 but also the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, so the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state is It is possible to suitably make the player recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls received.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (G), the display of the over winning effect video that was being displayed on the image display device 5 as an over winning effect has ended, and a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is now displayed.

(Suggestion of setting based on over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the setting value, and to be able to execute the above-mentioned over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set to high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound "Peep-Paw" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that the setting suggestion effect based on the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, an over winning effect as shown in Figure 12-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set high In addition, an over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over winning performance may have different performance modes depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Further, the over winning effect may have different effects depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

(If there is a round in which the specified number of prizes was not won and a round in which over-wins occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

As mentioned above, the open state of the jackpot game state continues until the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot hole reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500 balls, but since over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games, the final The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, if there is a round in which the predetermined number of winnings is not won and a round in which over-winning occurs, the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the expected number of winnings display 20SHK2. By checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there was a round in which the predetermined number of prizes was not won, and that there was a round in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the production operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display 20SHEF becomes invisible or difficult. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 has not been updated and remains at "1500".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes are not won and a round in which over-wins occur, a sense of incongruity is prevented from occurring due to the values of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2. be able to.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot game state. . Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a performance control CPU 120 that can execute an over winning performance when an over winning performance occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. A scheduled number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-win occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, the user feels more uncomfortable than when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using the image display device 5 and a performance using the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the over winning performance.

Further, as described above, when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a game ball has entered the special variable prize winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 naturally come into view. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, attention can also be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Furthermore, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to recognize in advance that an over-win has occurred by executing the over-win presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over-winning presentation.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning presentation continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the update of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example regarding characteristic part 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding error detection codes and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for playing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage, the CPU 103 will be able to resume the game played before the power outage after the power outage is restored by executing the power supply outage process. Can be continued.

On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the performance. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 cannot continue the performance based on the information on the game before the power outage after the power outage is restored.

For example, if power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like during a round game, the effect control CPU 120 will not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the production control CPU 120 may display the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power outage has been restored, or display specific information such as "????/????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a winning occurs in the round game after the power outage is restored, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 is not executing the performance corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over-win has occurred in one round of the round game after the power outage has been restored, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the over-win performance using the image display device 5, but will use the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to perform an over winning effect using the attacker lamp 9c. Note that the production control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by using a production control command that notifies the player of an over-win.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed, so that a feeling of discomfort does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-win occurs, it can be notified to that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable state that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize), control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, a pachinko machine); The gaming machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when controlled to be in a jackpot game state, etc.) , a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when more than a predetermined number of game media win the variable prize winning means in the first round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the first round game); (e.g., comprising a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win performance when an over-win performance occurs), and the display means is configured to display a prize that is awarded when the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means. It is possible to display a first award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value and a second award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value scheduled to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when more game media than the predetermined number win a prize in the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs, and the second award amount display is made visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display (for example, when the expected acquisition amount display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display. , updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.), the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect (updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) before the second grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display. The CPU 120 is characterized by starting the over-winning presentation before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the second application amount display is updated, a feeling of discomfort occurs when the value of the second application amount display is updated, compared to when the value of the second application amount display is updated while the second application amount display is made visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above includes an audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the specific effect as the specific effect. It is possible to perform a performance by the display means and a performance by the audio output means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance by the image display device 5 and a performance by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance). be feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the performance effect of the specific performance can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means when the game medium enters the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 shows that the game ball has won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7). At this time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area near the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to express the fact that a game ball has entered the variable prize winning means through a display effect on the display means, and it is possible to improve interest. Moreover, since not only the second application amount display but also the first application amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed when the effect display 20SHEF is moved. (for example, when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display automatically come into view. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, attention can also be drawn to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the specific performance execution means is configured to perform Start a specific performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more than a predetermined number of game media have been won by the variable winning means by executing the specific performance, so that the second award amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, and the specific performance execution means is configured to The specific effect can be executed in a manner that suggests the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of executing the over winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value set). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific performance.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific performance execution means ends the specific performance after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the effect display 20SHEF to After the competition ends, the over-winning performance must be ended, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display becomes visible while the specific performance continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the second grant amount display being updated can be avoided. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Other examples of transition to time saving state)
In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time-saving state is exemplified in such a manner that the transition to the time-saving state is made through a jackpot state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a special random number or another random number, the timing when winning a prize in the starting opening is good.

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers are used, the winning value will be the lottery result using the special random numbers, and if small-hit pattern random numbers are used for time-saving symbols, the winning value will be the specific small-winning symbol. When a random number is used as a winning value and a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used for a time-saving symbol lottery, the random number for a fall lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as the winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure and when the small winning symbol uses the time-saving symbols together, the variable display count of the time-saving state is made not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving region is passed.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. Incidentally, the time saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time saving state or the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number value is used for the lottery. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, whether the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not drawn may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbols, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbols can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot, it is in a high probability low base state when the gaming hall opens, and the high probability low base state is displayed for a specified number of times. After the variable display has been executed and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantage when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state), and includes a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area, and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means includes the first display area and the second display area 20SH51. In the display area, a background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). (for example, the image display device 5 may In the second display area 20SH52, an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, As a notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value given has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and the amount of gaming value given. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot game state on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquired number notification display 20SHKH that informs that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", "1000 over" is displayed. ”, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches “2000 balls”, it is possible to display a number-of-acquisition notification display that says “Over 2000”, etc. ), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state). etc.), and the notification display ends the display when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH stops the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display). The characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are the same as for the acquisition number display 20SHK). (e.g., the characters used for the amount display and the notification display include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed.) , the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the specific characters used in the award amount display are , the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK indicate that the background image is not visible from the specific area), and the specific character used for the notification display is The text indicates that the background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific text used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH indicates that the background video is visible from the specific area, etc.);
When displaying the award amount display, display the notification display (for example, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, etc.) ,
moreover,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the state control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the state control means makes the numerical information updated by the updating means a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, As shown, the updating means (the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) is used when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. An example of this is a gaming machine that updates numerical information depending on the situation (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-13).

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. I can do it.

In other words, the specific character used to display the amount awarded is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in an advantageous state, and the background image is made invisible from the specific area surrounded by the line forming the character. The text used for the notification display is larger than the text used to display the amount to be dispensed, and the background image is visible from a specific area, so the amount displayed should always be checked even though it is in small letters. On the other hand, the notification display can display the fact that the predetermined amount has been reached in large letters without hiding the background image, and it can also be used to display a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. For example, since the numerical information is updated depending on whether the first identification information is variable or the second identification information is Since the information becomes easier to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued, the player's desire to play can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, allows players to easily grasp the amount of gaming value provided and to easily recognize when a predetermined amount has been reached, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Further, the expected degree of jackpot, the number of times the jackpot has been controlled, etc. may be notified depending on the size of characters and the type of lines used in the notification display. By doing so, the display mode of the notification effect creates a sense of anticipation and improves interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information are executed, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the situation, and that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) (a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-13) that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. , the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17. (for example, the part that executes the variable display of the second identification information), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the first identification information is displayed variably or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13). As shown in FIG. As shown in 14-49, based on the execution of step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120) and the special notification performance (for example, The background image changes as shown in Figures 14-52 (C1) and (C2). As shown in Figure 14-53 (B), there is a blackout at the start of the change. As shown in Figure 14-54 (C). A special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) is further provided, and the predetermined suggestion effect is The execution means has a common rate of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 14-50) Examples include gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S909). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, it is determined by, for example, a parity bit or a checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-47.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 14-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-1, fourth symbol displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among these, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the fluctuating display of the fourth symbol is executed by repeating alternately lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs. Ru.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this feature section 108IW, a common figure game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this feature section 108IW, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present feature section 108IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 14-2 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 14-3 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

As shown in Figures 14-2 (A) and 14-3 (A), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-probability variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "242/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-2(B) and 14-3(B), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2420/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (about 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the variable probability state compared to the non-probable variable state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-2, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is in a variable state or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 14-3, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not), (regardless of whether the state is non-deterministic or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time saving deviation is the same regardless of the set value.

Even if the jackpot probability is varied according to the setting value as described above, while the probability of losing time is constant, as shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3, By varying the probabilities between set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent.

In addition, it may be further configured to be controllable to a small winning gaming state. If the configuration is such that the small win can also be determined, for example, the configuration may be such that the small win probability is constant regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In addition, in the case where the small win can also be determined, the structure may be such that there is a small win with time saving that controls the time saving state using the small win as an opportunity.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3 are just examples, and various ways of setting the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability are possible. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is approximately 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 1/400. In the case where the display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is approximately 1/200, but on the contrary, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving failure probability is approximately 1/200, When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving probability may be configured to be approximately 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 14-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 14-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed or the next jackpot occurs.

A "variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

"Suddenly variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of games (10 in this example) are played. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a ball wins (therefore, the long opening of the grand prize opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "suddenly variable jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the jackpot is kept open for a short period of time). (opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "suddenly variable probability jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the big winning hole, and it can be made to appear as if the state has suddenly shifted to a variable probability state.

As shown in Figure 14-4 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a 40% probability; A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and the 55 A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 5%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIG. 14-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 14-5(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 14-5(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 14-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figure 14-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is shortened, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case, there is a probability of 1/3 that it is determined to be a "time saving error A", a 1/3 probability that it is determined to be a "time saving error B", and a 1/3 probability that it is a "time saving error C". It is determined that

Note that the example shown in FIG. 14-5 is just one example, and various ways of determining the time saving type can be considered. For example, if it is determined that the first special symbol is a change in time saving, the probability of determining ``time saving C'' is increased, but if it is determined that the second special symbol is a change in time saving, it is determined that the time saving is incorrect. The determination rate of the time saving type may be made different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, such as by increasing the probability of determining ``missing A''.

Further, for example, if the configuration is configured such that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction, it may be configured so that the time reduction number counter etc. is not uniformly overwritten even if the time reduction is exceeded, or the time reduction failure symbol Depending on the type, the time saving counter etc. may be overwritten or not overwritten in some cases.

FIG. 14-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving types. As shown in FIG. 14-6, in this example, in the normal state, when the "time saving difference A" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 times, and when the "time saving difference B" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state of 50 times. The time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 times, and in the case of "time saving failure C", the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 time saving times. In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving loss A", the time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot, and when it becomes "time saving loss B", it is controlled to the time saving state with 200 time saving times, and "time saving loss C'', the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, in the case of saving time saving, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 800 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off in a variable probability state. Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is canceled even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after the time reduction is controlled to a time reduction state of 800 time reductions due to the relief time reduction, if a jackpot does not occur even after 800 fluctuation displays are completed, the relief time reduction is resumed. Accordingly, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled to the number of time saving times of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to relief time reduction is essentially until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction attainment rate for each set value will be explained. The relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by performing fluctuations n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K=Relief time saving attainment rate, P=Denominator of jackpot probability ML, n=Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319. Since it is about 1/310, the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 7.5%, and if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 6.9%, If the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 6.3%, and if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.7%, and if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, it is possible to rescue the player.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-6. For example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the control may be configured such that the number of time saving times is the same (100) in the normal state and in the time saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time savings is controlled to be 100 times, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e. It may also be configured such that the current state falls from the time saving state to the normal state. There are various possible ways to control the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 108IW. Among these, FIG. 14-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpot. Further, FIG. 14-7(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 14-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 14-7(D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time-saving state time control controlled via the time-saving difference.

Further, FIG. 14-8(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for failures in the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving method. Further, FIGS. 14-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within the last 10 variations that shorten the relief time. Among these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8(F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less. Further, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 14-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for failure in a variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 14-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display, which shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 14-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot with a fluctuation display that shortens the rescue time.

As shown in FIG. 14-7(A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns include variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortening variation), The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (D), in this example, when there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIGS. 14-7(C), 14-7(D), and 14-8(E), in this example, in the time shortening state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (very shortened variation) and the variation pattern Pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) are determined at a high rate, and the average variation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving error, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, the selection rate of variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) is as high as 99%, compared to the time saving state controlled via time saving or jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened variation) increases the rate at which variable display is executed, and the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-7(C), 14-7(D), and 14-8(E), in this example, compared to The selection probability is high at 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Also, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving or jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ), and there is no case where a super reach is executed. In other words, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time reduction, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time reduction loss or jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. There is. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. This prevents the user from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via the rescue time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of failure, but it may be configured so that it is executed. For example, in a time saving state controlled via a relief time saving, super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in a time saving state controlled via a time saving loss or a jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. Since the ratio of such events is lowered, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-8 (F), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the rescue time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less, For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-8 (G), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the rescue time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 There is no case where (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where super reach is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened, but a jackpot does not occur. Incidentally, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, the ratio is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 14-7(C)). The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined at the time of a miss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 14-8 (H), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is even more than that in the short time state. is shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I), in this example, the variation display shortens the rescue time, and if the result is a failure, the variation pattern PA3-1 (injection failure) is determined as the variation pattern. Ru. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time saving, which is not used for a variation display that does not shorten rescue time, but is used only for a variation display (missing) that shortens rescue time. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry), as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, (See FIGS. 14-38(G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the game is controlled to be in a time-saving state, and it is also possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-8 (J), in this example, if the variation display shortens the relief time and the jackpot is missed, the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time that is not used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time, but is used only for a variation display that shortens the rescue time (jackpot). In this example, when the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, Fig. 14 -38 (G), (H)) and the same type of performance (for example, see Figure 14-41 (G')), a performance that notifies you of a jackpot (for example, Figure 14-41) (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 is an example, and various methods are possible. For example, if there is a time-saving error during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is controlled again, it is the same as the fluctuation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled via jackpot shown in Figure 14-7 (C). The variation pattern may be determined using a table.

In addition, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next jackpot (in this example, when the time saving state becomes A during the time saving state) in the case where the time saving is missed, the jackpot shown in Figure 14-7 (C) can be achieved. The variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled by .

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 14-8 (E), during the time saving state via relief time saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 of extremely shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the variation display Because the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable preview performances and advance preview performances. For example, when in a time saving state via relief time saving, an effect image may be displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, a lamp or LED may be turned on, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect may be displayed. Performances such as outputting different fluctuating stop sounds are performed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a variation pattern table E is provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, but the variation pattern table E is not provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, and for example, when The variation pattern may be determined using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7(C)) during the time saving state.

Additionally, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case is shown in which the changeover pattern tables are switched to fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see Figures 14-8 (F) and (G)). , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time becomes short becomes smaller, or the number of breaks such as 100 or 200 remaining variations may be configured. It may be configured such that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested by switching the fluctuation pattern table only in this case.

Furthermore, in this example, the configuration is such that different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation times are different) for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via losing time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), or the time saving state via relief time saving is better than the time saving state via jackpot or loss time saving. Alternatively, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10, command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (missing specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a failure (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command) (time saving deviation A specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 specification command) (time saving deviation B specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (time saving deviation C specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C. be.

Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variable pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a variable probability jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a variable probability jackpot. .

Command 95XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the 1 designation command for the number of relief time reductions, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, Command 957E(H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command. In this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and it is uniformly issued as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 957F(H) is transmitted.

Command 96XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, Command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command.

Command 97XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of restoration and is transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened when the power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is sent as a command to specify the number of times that the rescue time is shortened at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, a command 9708 (H) is sent as a command for specifying the number of times to save time during recovery.

In addition, in this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be transmitted in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the example is shown in which the information is sent to the Internet, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a combination of two commands may be transmitted so that even if the remaining number of commands is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in a specific manner.

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to be in a time saving state during rescue time saving. Command E004 (H) is a performance control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies to start displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, when no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0). Further, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Also, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode that executes setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode that executes setting confirmation processing, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode ends, and then a customer waiting demo specification Command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A waiting demo specification command is sent. As described later, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 10 seconds elapse without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning, the rescue time saving function is activated. A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). Furthermore, when three minutes have passed without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration movie is played back.

Command F1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. Note that "XX" is set to a value corresponding to the set value.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 14-9 and FIG. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 14-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG. 13.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing recovery from power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and send a recovery rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a recovery time rescue time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the rescue time saving number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a recovery time saving time saving number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of times the recovery time is shortened is sent, and the remaining recovery time up to the current rescue time is sent. The number of changes will be notified. Further, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power outage), it is possible to shorten the rescue time. With this configuration, in a situation where a pending memory corresponding to a variable display that shortens the rescue time is stored before a power outage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs.

Note that although this example shows a case where a recovery time reduction number specifying command is transmitted separately from the recovery command at the time of power outage recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened may be set in the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, and then transmitted.

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if neither a jackpot nor a time saving error occurs even after 800 fluctuation displays are executed, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is entered. will be controlled by. In this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating the time saving state, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state, and the pending memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the rescue time reduction number counter from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

(Special design normal processing)
FIGS. 14-12 and 14-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 100IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this feature section 108IW, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 14-2 and 14-3) with a random number for hit determination, and executes processing to determine that it is a jackpot if they match. It is a program. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 determines the low probability jackpot determination value (Figure 14-2 (A) and Figure 14-3 (See (A)) to determine the jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot judgment value for high probability (see Fig. 14-2 (B) and Fig. 14-3 (B)). Make a jackpot determination. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (N in step 100 IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 or not. (Step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 100 IWS69).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to subtract the time reduction counter before the process of counting the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70, but such a processing mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of fluctuations up to the time saving time reduction after step 100IWS70 is executed. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving number counter to "800" (see step 100 IWS172), the value of the time saving number counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the relief time, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be set to "901", which is one more, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100 IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS71). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time reduction state, or a variable probability state. . In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N at step 100 IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 957E(H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100 IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is to be controlled at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 100 IWS75). . Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and commands 957F as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800). It is checked whether it is (step 100IWS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs production control of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. control to transmit the information to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS79.

In addition, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction, and sends the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute a stirring effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect, which will be described later.

For example, as described later, the rescue time reduction count counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the rescue time reduction occurs, and in a configuration where relief time reduction can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction is The configuration is configured so that the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is sent only when the time reduction occurs, and the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the number 2 of rescue time reductions is sent when the rescue time is shortened from the second time onwards. It may be configured not to do so.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving mode is set (step 100 IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving mode), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time saving state is in the state of time saving via relief time saving, the process of determining whether the time saving is missed after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is determined to be the case without saving. It was decided that

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the time saving state is not uniformly determined as a time saving failure not only during the time saving state via the rescue time saving, but also during the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. In other words, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the process for determining whether the time saving is not achieved after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is not performed as it is. You may decide to set it as an outlier.

Conversely, even in the time saving state via relief time saving, the process from step 100IWS81 onward may be executed to determine the time saving deviation. Further, it may be configured such that both a relief time reduction and a time reduction deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state with priority given to saving time, or it may be configured to control to a time saving state giving priority to a time saving error.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the time saving state is not via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS80 is executed, if the state is in a variable probability state, it is determined that the time saving is not possible without performing the process of determining whether the time saving is not possible after step 100IWS81. Ru.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether or not to save time, using a decision table for determining whether or not to reduce time. is carried out, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the time (step 100 IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time-saving failure determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving failure occurs with a probability of approximately 1/400. (See Figure 14-2). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error occurs with a probability of about 1/200 ( (See Figure 14-3).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 selects the type (time reduction A, time reduction B, time saving error C) is determined as the type of time saving error (step 100 IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number common to the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, when configured to determine both the small hit and the small hit type, a common random number for type determination is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the jackpot type determination and time saving type determination. The configuration may be such that the determination process is performed based on the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make it a normal jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided to suddenly make a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be a time saving loss A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined that the time saving difference is B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided that the time saving difference is C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6". If it is decided to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 14-14 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and a jackpot is displayed), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 14-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 14-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702). .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time reduction frequency display is an error and the value is off), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 14-8 (I) as a table for determining the variation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less. Check whether it is. Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter or the second pending storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100 IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses a table for determining the variation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table F is selected (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending memory counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table G of is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining a variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 14-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern table stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 is to be used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 14-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sends the result of the decision as to whether or not it will be a jackpot, the result of the decision as to the type of jackpot, and the time saving type, if it has not yet been sent. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS1122). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when a time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right hit LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not decided to cancel the time saving (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time shortening determination flag is not set (N in step 100 IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets "0.5" to the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "second" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the probability change flag, time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C, and for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the probability change state. The time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is reset (step 100 IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when a jackpot is triggered, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the jackpot game ends, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction error occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, this example shows a case where, when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 100IWS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 100 IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the relief time saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 800 time saving times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processing in steps 100IWS143 and S144, in this example, if the time saving state is controlled to be shortened by taking the relief time shortening as an opportunity, the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without hitting the jackpot or losing the time shortening. Taking this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. Thereafter, if the next jackpot or time saving error does not occur even after performing the variable display 800 times, the second relief time saving occurs and the time saving state is controlled. In addition, in this example, a time reduction error does not occur in a time reduction state triggered by a relief time reduction, but it may occur, and when it occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter (step 100IWS147), and checks whether the value of the probability variation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability variation state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS153.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed, thereby transitioning to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final fluctuation or the probability changing final fluctuation, and ending the right hit notification. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the time-saving final fluctuation or the probability-variable final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, this example shows a case where the definite variable state ends and the time saving state also ends in the definite variable final fluctuation, but this is not the only case; it is also possible to end only the definite variable state and continue the time saving state. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100 IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" if the time saving is missed (Y in step 100 IWS155). (Step 100IWS156). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 ( Step 100IWS161). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction counter is set to ``800'' due to the time reduction failure, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the time reduction failure, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction failure occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, by executing the processing in steps 100IWS166 and S168, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is executed. By transmitting the image, the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not decided to skip the time saving (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In addition, in this example, by controlling the time saving state at the timing when the relief time becomes short and also setting the relief time shortening counter (set to "800"), it is possible to cause the relief time shortening to occur continuously. Although the time saving state is configured so that once the time saving occurs, the time saving state continues until the jackpot occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the timing when the rescue time is shortened, the rescue time shortening counter is not set, only the time saving state is controlled, and after that, the rescue time shortening counter is set at the timing when the 800-time fluctuation display ends and control is returned to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction number counter, "800" is set, and each time the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ”, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, set it to 0, and each time you execute the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter is incremented by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 800. It may be configured to shorten the relief time based on this.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, to secure a production period such as mode transition production, but during the symbol confirmation period, the image display device In step 5, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, but only the small pattern may be displayed, so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown in which the process of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time reductions to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs, but this is not limited to such an aspect. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time saving number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, the time saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times. For example, if the time saving is shortened the first time, the time saving counter is set to ``100'', and if the saving time is shortened the second time, the time saving counter is set to ``800''. Good too.

Alternatively, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIGS. 14-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 14-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the variable display, which shortens the relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed, so if the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. Also, if the relief time is shortened, it may be shifted to the time shortening state, so if a symbol that is out of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal will be activated at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output starts.

Note that the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol confirmation period but also during the jackpot game. In addition, this example shows a case where separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) are output in the case where the time saving is missed and the case where the rescue time is shortened, but the dual-purpose external output signal It may be configured to output .

Further, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after outputting the fluctuation stop signal during the pattern determination period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for a losing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol determination period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol determination period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid signal failure from occurring externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously outputted even during the time saving state via the rescue time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 14-19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100 IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the special symbol stop symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state A designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls to a probability variable state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 108IW will be explained. FIG. 14-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. As shown in FIG. 14-20, in the normal state, if a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A ( (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, in the normal state, even if it is a loss, if a time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving loss) (see step 100 IWS166). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clearing processing, jackpot or time shortening failure, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time shortening failure occurring) case), the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled (see step 100 IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the variable probability state, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is again controlled to the variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100 IWS80), and there is no case where the saving time is shortened. In addition, in the variable probability state, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time saving state A, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the control is performed again. The time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if the time saving state A is a loss, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time-saving state A, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time saving state B, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see step 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state B is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even in the case of a loss in the time saving state B, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled again (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time saving is off A during the time saving state and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving state B is continued until the next jackpot occurs (see step 100 IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time saving state C, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state C is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). In addition, in the time saving state C, when 800 fluctuation displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state B is uniformly transferred when a time saving missed symbol is derived and displayed during the time saving state A, the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, it is configured to compare the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving type, and if the remaining number of current time saving times is greater, the current time saving state A is continued as is. It's okay.

In addition, although this example shows a case where when a normal jackpot occurs during time saving state B, the time saving state A is uniformly shifted to, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the number of time saving times corresponding to the normal jackpot (in this example, 100 times), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving number is greater, continue the current time saving state B. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving losing symbol is not derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100 IWS79), but this is not limited to such a mode, for example. , it may be configured such that even in the time saving state C, it can be determined that the time saving is over.

Further, in this example, when the variable probability state is controlled, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that a lottery process is used to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display, and the variable probability state may be terminated based on the decision to end the variable probability state.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIG. 14-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In FIG. 14-21, the processes in steps S71 to S76 are similar to those shown in FIG.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process in step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in the form of a reduced left-center right ornamental symbol is executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process in step 100IWS702, in the image display device 5, in addition to the fluctuating display of the decorative design, synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. A variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Moreover, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the variable display of the 4th symbol is executed on the 4th symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process in step S77 is the same as the process in step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, the two LEDs arranged above and below alternately turn on and off in the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a, 21b, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol. be done.

Further, when the variation time ends, the fourth symbol, the stop symbol, is displayed as a fixed symbol at the start of the symbol confirmation period. In this case, when a jackpot occurs, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in red as a jackpot symbol. In addition, when the time saving is over, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in a blue light state as a time saving lapse symbol. In addition, in the case of a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a loss symbol (no time saving) in a state where they are turned off.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be derived and displayed in a manner that can distinguish the jackpot type and the time saving type. Good too.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a special symbol is provided as the time saving loss symbol of the 4th symbol, but the stop symbol of the 4th symbol is not limited to such an embodiment. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 14-22 and 14-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received production control command is a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100 IWS625), the production control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100 IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery (step 100 IWS629), the effect control CPU 120, based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery, causes the image display device 5 to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery. Control is performed to display the initial roll according to the number of times (step 100 IWS 630). For example, if the received EXT data of the command to specify the number of times to shorten rescue time during recovery is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the time to save is reduced is 100 or less), the initial roll is "112". is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial The result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as the result, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition to displaying the initial result indicating the number of fluctuations remaining when power is restored, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display indicating the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened may be displayed. , a combination of symbols indicating the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed. In addition, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, or a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations, etc. The configuration may be such that the suggestion display is performed at a relatively early stage. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not suggested (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not indicated). (The remaining number of fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 100IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 100 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100 IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time saving state is the same, it is determined whether it is a time saving state via jackpot, a time saving state via time saving, or a time saving state via rescue time saving. Display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in gaming status, and it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, a common background image is displayed regardless of the time saving state via jackpot, time saving state via time saving loss, or time saving state via rescue time saving. may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. It may be configured as follows.

If the received production control command is a probability variable state designation command (step 100 IWS639), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS640).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a time-saving missed symbol is derived and displayed or when a rescue time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126 and S1134). , the lighting of the right hit notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

If the received production control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 100 IWS645 ). For example, if a special winning slot winning designation command is received, a winning slot winning flag indicating that a winning slot has been won is set. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration production control process)
FIG. 14-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration performance control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, if no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0), the performance control board is transferred from the main board 11. A customer waiting demonstration designation command is sent to No. 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 will perform a performance control CPU 120 if 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winnings after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y in step 105 IWS 250), a telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105 IWS 251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed during a period when no variable display is performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIGS. 14-25 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. Among Figures 14-25, Figure 14-25 (A) is a subtitle display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 14-25 (B) is This is a telop display execution lottery table used when the number is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 14-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying telops while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying subtitles while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether an advantageous setting value has been set based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Note that although FIG. 14-25 shows an example of setting value 1 and setting value 6 to simplify the explanation, it is also possible to provide a table corresponding to each setting value, or A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105 IWS 254).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop using a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105 IWS253, the presentation mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

Figure 14-25 (C) is a subtitle mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 14-25 (D) is a drawing table for determining the telop format used when the setting value is set to "6". This is a lottery table for determining the telop format used when

As shown in FIGS. 14-25(C) and (D), in this example, the presentation mode of the telop displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened by the display mode of the telop while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the performance mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous setting value has been set depending on the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning (Y in step 105 IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is played back (step 105 IWS 256).

Note that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer end when the performance control command etc. at the time of starting winning is received.

FIG. 14-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 14-26, the screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C), or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 14-26(A), if the pending memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is determined to do so, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, if it is decided to display the telop display according to the blue presentation mode, the telop display 108IW001 with blue edges is displayed (in the example of Figure 14-26 (B), the edges are white). ). In addition, if it is decided to display a caption display based on the red presentation mode, the caption display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26(D), the edge is painted black). ).

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the performance control board 12 side, if 3 minutes elapse without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, a demonstration is displayed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 14-26(C) and (E), the telop display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Pre-read notice setting process)
FIG. 14-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the production control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns is executed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. It will be done. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

In the pre-read preview setting process (step S161), for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, the production control CPU 120 sends production control commands at the time of starting winnings (for example, production control commands for specifying determination results such as the occurrence of starting winnings, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgments). ) is received (step 108 IWS701).

If the production control command at the time of starting winning is received, the production control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the production control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether the number is large (step 108 IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the starting winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. If the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. In this case, the advance notice setting process is ended.

In this example, by executing the process in step 108IWS702, a look-ahead preview effect is created that targets the variable display when the relief time becomes short among the variable displays corresponding to the suspended memory stored before the relief time becomes short. While it is possible to execute it, it restricts the execution of a look-ahead preview effect that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of the pre-read preview performance across the relief time reduction period where the gaming state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation contents.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed before the relief time is shortened, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and the performance type and performance mode in the case of execution (step 108 IWS703).

FIG. 14-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. In step 108 IWS703, each table shown in FIG. 14-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect, and if so, the effect type and effect mode.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice effect using the pre-read notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(A). However, when the gaming state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance using the pre-read notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(B).

As shown in Figures 14-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the pre-read preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot and a jackpot. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher when the result is a failure than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the look-ahead preview performance, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (A) and (B), there is a case where the displayed result is lower in time saving state C than in gaming states other than time saving state C. In addition, the system is configured so that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is low. With such a configuration, in the case of time saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a jackpot does not occur even though the advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(C) is used to execute When the performance type of the pre-reading notice performance to be executed is determined and the gaming state is the time saving state C, the effect of the pre-reading notice performance to be executed is determined using the pre-reading notice performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). Decide on the type. Specifically, the performance type is determined to be either a chance performance or a pending change performance.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect when the display result of the change display that is executed before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a chance eye (in this example, "778"). This is a performance that suggests that this will be a jackpot. In the chance effect, for example, an effect is performed to incite whether or not the display result will be a chance result ("778" in this example). Also, for example, when a chance eye effect is executed using a red effect mode, a red chance eye effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when a chance eye effect is executed using a blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change performance suggests that the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance will be a jackpot by displaying the pending display that corresponds to the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance in a display mode that is different from the normal display mode. It is a performance that Also, for example, when a pending change performance is executed in a red production mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when a pending change production is executed in a blue production mode, a blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 14-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of advance notice performance. Among Figures 14-29, Figures 14-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance effect, and Figures 14-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the hold change effect. This is an example.

When a chance effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the first variable display starts as shown in Figure 14-29 (A1), and then as shown in Figures 14-29 (B1) and (C1). The left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Then, as shown in Figure 14-29 (D1), the central decorative pattern stops at either "7", which is the chance number "778", or "6", which is not the chance number "778". A performance that provokes this is carried out. After that, as shown in Figure 14-29 (E1), when the central decorative pattern "7" stops and the chance number "778" stops displaying, a fluctuating display that becomes a jackpot is displayed while it is being held in memory. This suggests the possibility that a corresponding retained memory exists. Note that after the inciting effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance number "778" (for example, "768", etc.) may be stopped and displayed.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A2) and (B2), when a starting winning occurs, a new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 14-29, but can be performed at any timing after a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode and thereafter until the display of the corresponding hold display and active display ends. The display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the normal mode.

FIG. 14-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the pre-read preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via rescue. Among FIGS. 14-30, FIG. 14-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via jackpot and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance, and FIG. 14-30(B) is , is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-read notice performance. In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in Figure 14-30 (A), when performing a chance effect as a look-ahead preview effect, in the variable display that is executed from the time when the starting prize occurs until the variable display of the look-ahead target starts. , an effect is performed to incite whether or not the chance pattern will stop, and then the chance pattern will be stopped and displayed. Since such an inciting effect is included, when executing the chance effect, it is necessary to ensure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one fluctuating display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 14-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed at the timing when a starting prize occurs or from the time when a starting winning occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the display ends. Then, the pending display and active display according to the changed display mode are continued until the variable display of the prefetch target is completed. In other words, when executing a pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when a starting prize occurs until the variable display of the pre-read target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the pre-read target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead preview performance, the execution period is different between the chance performance and the pending change performance. That is, while the chance effect is executed during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variable display, the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the time saving state via jackpot, the extremely shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of loss, and the shortening variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time saving state via relief In this case, an extremely short variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed when the time is off. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-30, in the time saving state via relief, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance effect.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via jackpot, it is possible to execute both the chance effect and the pending change effect as the look-ahead preview effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance effect is restricted as a look-ahead preview effect, and only the pending change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute a pre-read preview performance depending on the gaming state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read notice performance, if the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, the pre-read notice performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(E) is used. , determines the performance mode of the pre-read preview performance to be executed, and when the gaming state is time saving state C, the pre-read preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-28 (D) is used to determine the pre-read preview performance to be executed. Determine the type of performance. Specifically, either the red presentation mode or the blue presentation mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 14-28 (E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and the case of a jackpot is better than the case of a miss. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher due to the red effect mode than in the case of . Therefore, by executing the pre-read preview performance in the red performance mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-28(E) and (F), when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With this configuration, in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the decrease in interest when the pre-read preview performance is executed is suppressed by the blue production mode with low jackpot expectation. be able to. In this example, when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the pre-read preview effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, the configuration is such that cases in which the display result is incorrect even though the pre-read preview effect is executed in the red effect mode do not occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 14-28, the pre-read notice can be used in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time) and in the case of not time-saving state C. The performance execution ratio, the type of performance, and the ratio of performance modes can be varied, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, execution of the preview performance is restricted (even if only the preview performance with high expectations is not executed). However, the execution of the pre-read preview effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be lowered (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the event of a failure may be restricted. It may be configured such that the ratio is lowered (or not executed), or the execution ratio of pre-fetch preview performances of types with high expectations may be lowered (or not executed).

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-28, for example, even in time-saving state C, if a variable display that results in a jackpot or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is not restricted. Good too.

When the processing in step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance effect, a chance effect flag is set in step 108IWS704 as execution setting of the chance effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process to be described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting a process table including the chance eye effect. Note that the chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, in step 108IWS704, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 14-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 100IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a "probable variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probability variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols "135" (sudden probability variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye pattern (in this example, "778") is determined.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 14-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table. In step 108 IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance using the advance notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-32 (A), and the relief time is shortened. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-32(B). In addition, when it is decided to execute a preview performance, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in Figure 14-32 (C). However, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-32(D).

As shown in Figures 14-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed both when the display result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the preview performance is higher when the result is a success than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the preview performance, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation of a jackpot.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-32 (A) and (B), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result is wrong than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the preview performance is performed during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, and the countdown performance and effect performance described later are executed). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less), a countdown performance and effect performance, which will be described later, are executed, but at this time, the timer is activated as a preview performance. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 14-32(C) and (D), in this example, there is a red presentation mode (for example, a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (for example, a blue presentation image is displayed). The system is configured such that the preview performance is executed in a red performance mode at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Therefore, by executing the preview presentation in the red presentation mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14-32 (C) and (D), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) If the display result is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is more than 10), a preview effect is executed using the red effect mode. It is structured so that the percentage of With this configuration, the interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode during the predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. can suppress the decline in

In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple types of preview performances with different jackpot expectations can be executed, the preview performances of types with high jackpot expectations (for example, if the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 levels, The execution is limited only for the type of preview performance where the jackpot expectation level is 4th level or higher) during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). Good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in Figure 14-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or time reduction is executed, a preview effect may be executed. You may choose not to limit it.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the case of time saving state C, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted, but the execution of the preview effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is reduced). In this case, it may be configured to reduce the execution rate (or not execute) of the preview performance in case of a failure, or to reduce the execution rate of the preview performance for types with high expectations. The execution rate may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800. (Step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined by the number of relief time shortening 2, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not a designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the production control CPU 120 will change the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including an inciting effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is selected (step 100 IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that includes the appropriate inciting effect. For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800". ” Select a process table that includes an inciting effect according to ``. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is none of 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, and 800, the production control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations is 0 (step 108 IWS805). In addition, whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 can be determined by, for example, checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot (step 108IWS806A). If the display result is not a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry performance that informs that the time-saving state is controlled by the rescue time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player by the time-shortening effect that the game will be controlled to be in a time-shortening state as a rescue time-saving, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes a time-saving pretense effect that notifies that a jackpot will be achieved after executing the same type of performance as the time-saving effect ( Step 100IWS806C). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player recognizes that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 0, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this example, if the displayed result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a time saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time saving fluctuation jackpot variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a jackpot is confirmed) is executed, which is not executed except when the number of variations of relief time reduction is reached, in which the three decorative symbols are aligned and vary. good. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

Also, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a failure when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern for relief time saving fluctuation is used; It may be possible to use a variation pattern for losing the same as usual, or it may be configured to use a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when and before reaching the number of fluctuations for saving time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example, orange) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving). (background image of the display color) (see step 078 IWS638), it is possible to notify that the time saving state will be controlled by reducing the rescue time by this change in the background image.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less ( Step 108IWS807). In addition, to check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and effect performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened. (Step 108IWS808). For example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 10), the count number until the rescue time is shortened is "0A (H)". Select a process table including countdown effects and effect effects corresponding to ``10''. Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "01 (H)" (the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. A process table including a countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is reached is 10 or less, the countdown performance and the effect performance are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and an inciting effect or a countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a background specification command that specifies a background image is configured to be sent, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the background specification command and then sent. It's okay. Then, the performance control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute an inciting performance or a countdown performance.

In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown performance and effect performance are always executed, but whether or not they are executed by lottery is determined. It may also be possible to decide whether In addition, for example, when the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is not 10 or less, so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances (for example, although they are executed in the same manner as countdown performances and effect performances, , the countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle (see Figure 14-42). Good too. In this case, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less is better than when it is not 10 or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 (N in step 108IWS807), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution setting of the chance production has been made (step 108IWS809). , when the execution setting of the chance effect has been made, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes the chance effect (including the effect that stimulates whether or not it will become a chance effect) (step 108 IWS810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, a performance in which the chance eye pattern does not stop display after executing the effect to incite whether or not it will be a chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to do so.

If the chance production is not set to be executed, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display processing)
14-33 and FIG. 14-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time shortening occurs during the normal state and cases where the rescue time shortens. However, in step 100IWS847, if the time saving is missed during the normal state, a mode transition effect for the time saving is missed and a process table corresponding to the right hit notification is selected, and if the saving time becomes short, the process table for the relief time saving is selected. Select a process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. In addition, whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received due to the relief time reduction is determined, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( This can be determined by checking whether or not H).

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 100IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 100IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y at step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y at step 100IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 100IWS858). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 100IWS857 and the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 14-35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmed production period timer (step 100 IWS871), and checks whether the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and speakers 8L and 8R as production components) is executed according to (step 100IWS874).

Furthermore, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed for confirmation (step 100IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the production control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols (no time saving), losing time reducing symbols, jackpot symbols) (step 100 IWS879 ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance including a mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the transition to a variable probability state (probability variable mode) or a time saving state (time saving mode)) and a right hit notification. (Step 100IWS885). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing symbol (no time saving) or the time reducing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the variable display start waiting process. (Step S170) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 100IWS889).

(Production execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time will be explained. FIG. 14-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time. As shown in Figure 14-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that results in a relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and decorative symbol ends, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is displayed. When is stopped and displayed, a missed symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the missed symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missed symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for a 20 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 14-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, a right hit notification is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-36 (see step 100 IWS847). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 14-36, the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the gaming state, and also to improve the interest. can be improved.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be explained. FIGS. 14-37 to 14-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. Note that in FIGS. 14-37 to 14-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 14-37(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 revolutions when the symbol stops. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed at the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed at the upper right. For example, when there are 800 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, it is assumed that the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and a missed pattern (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, which says, "Relief time saving starts in 800 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine that is equipped with a shortened rescue time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time saving mode, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and the missing pattern (in this example, "423") It is assumed that a combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 14-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW 102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying, "700 rotations left to start saving time!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B), a case is shown in which an inciting effect indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the incitement effect is not executed when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, and the incitement effect is performed when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300, 200, or 100 times). It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the inciting effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is received, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and when it is decided to execute the inciting effect, The configuration may be such that the excitement effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 14-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened decreases, the execution rate of the inciting effect increases.

Then, as shown in Figures 14-37 (C) to 14-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to short rescue time, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen. Ru. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a countdown from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which out-of-place symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-37 (C) to 14-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to relief time reduction, effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range corresponding to the number of remaining revolutions. . In this example, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases) as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the time for relief approaches the time).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, It is assumed that a combination of symbols "123" is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (F), when there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the variable display of the decorative symbols 100IW100 and the small symbols 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) starts. , as shown in FIG. 14-38 (G), a time-saving entry effect is started to notify that the time-saving state (relief time reduction) is being controlled, and a time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to be in a time saving state (relief time saving), and it is possible to improve interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is entered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-38(G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decorative symbols 100IW100 are not displayed, and only the small symbols 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) are derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving production, it is also possible to make notifications that are generally carried out during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take out a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent getting hooked, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. may be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush performance may be made in the same manner as in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving rush effect, but may be made during the ending period of the first jackpot after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the relief time reduction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (I), when the symbol determination period begins, a mode performance start display 100IW105 of "Very hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition performance is started. Note that from now on, even in the mode transition performance, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 100IW 106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 14-1) is displayed. Ru. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 100IW106 was displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In addition, in this example, even in the case of a jackpot, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1", similar to FIG. 14-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received prefetch determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high probability that a fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time shortening state via the shortening of rescue time (see Figure 14-8 (E)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the relief time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 14-39 (K) is displayed without particularly checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 14-39 (K) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 that reads "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 14-38(H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39(L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a rescue time saving effect mode is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-40(M), when the selection of the performance mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush production will be explained. FIG. 14-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode of the time-saving rush performance. The example shown in FIG. 14-41 follows the example shown in FIGS. 14-37(A) to (D).

As shown in Fig. 14-41 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, "123 It is assumed that the symbol combination ``'' is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (F'), there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time saving mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that although this variable display can shorten the rescue time, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game does not shift to a time saving state due to relief time saving, but shifts to a jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (G'), the time-saving rush performance is started, and the time-saving rush performance display 100IW104C having the same aspect as the time-saving rush performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (G'), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just like when the time-saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (H), when the display of the time-saving effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern stops, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254" combinations) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot pattern (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot game. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, the configuration of this feature section 108IW can also be used to execute a bonus game in which the game ball is controlled to be a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize winning area) in a prize object during a small prize game. When applied to a gaming machine that is configured to enable this, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the rescue time is a small hit, a time saving effect is executed to notify that a small hit has occurred. Good too.

Next, the so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance will be explained. FIG. 14-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance.

As shown in Figures 14-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called false countdown effect is executed, so that the number of remaining rotations is reduced to 10 rotations. A countdown display 100IW104A depending on the situation is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is reduced to 10. Effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range depending on the number of times. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases).

As shown in FIG. 14-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the transition to rescue time saving is not 0, the time saving entry effect is not executed.

When configuring so-called fake countdown effects and effect effects as shown in Figure 14-42 to be executable, the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B). You may choose not to perform any inciting effects that suggest this. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether it is genuine or fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the performance in the relief time shortening is explained, and a countdown is displayed, but it may be displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate or while the symbol is fluctuating.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when executing the RAM clearing process, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is missed. If the configuration is configured to execute a story (such as a story with high-speed fluctuation, etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of that story may also be cleared. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the feature section 108IW, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 seconds, in the variable display that shortens the rescue time, and the mode transition performance and right hit notification are executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is set until the next variation starts, and the mode transition effect and right-hand hit notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a first modification will be described in which a postponement period is provided until the start of the next variation and the mode transition effect and right-handed hit notification are executed.

FIG. 14-43 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in modification 1. As shown in FIG. 14-43, in modification 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 5, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In addition, in the first modification, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is the same as the starting winning determining process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Moreover, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Moreover, the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Further, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Moreover, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Moreover, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Moreover, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". Moreover, the small hit opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Moreover, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) and variation pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. It is. In addition, in modification example 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. This differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is transmitted.

In addition, in modification 1, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit ending process (step 100IWS121) are the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to the small winning ending process (step S120) shown in FIG. It is similar to

FIG. 14-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in modification 1. In modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is similar to those shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17. In modification example 1, when the relief time saving determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) to the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next change. A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). Note that the processing at step 100IWS175 is similar to the processing shown in FIGS. 14-17.

FIG. 14-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in modification 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in Modification 1, in the next change postponement process, a case is shown in which the time reduction state is entered at the timing when the postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) until the start of the next change has elapsed. It is not limited to the form. For example, it may be configured such that a right-handed notification is given in the next variation postponement process, and the time reduction state is entered at the start of the postponement period or in the middle of the postponement period until the start of the next variation. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the time saving state may be controlled and the right-handed hit notification may be performed, or the time saving state may not be controlled and only the right-handed hitting notification is performed. There are many possible ways.

Further, in the first modification, a case is shown in which 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next change postponement process, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is configured so that the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the time reduction will be different if the relief time reduction occurs during normal state. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and it is measured in the next change postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onward. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative pattern, but displays only the small pattern, and is configured so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. Good too.

In addition, in modification 1, when the relief time is shortened, the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next change starts, but this is not limited to such a mode. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which the next variation postponement process similar to Modification Example 1 is executed to extend the period until the next variation is started.

Further, as described above, when the present invention is also applied to the display of fluctuations in time reduction, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 14-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next fluctuation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period for the fluctuating display in the event of a time shortening can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuating display, and processing related to right hit notification etc. can also be done in the case of relief time shortening, etc. can be executed in the same process.

FIG. 14-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. 14-46, in Modification 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol ends, and the When the symbol (no time saver) is stopped and displayed, the missed symbol (no time saver) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the fluctuating display of the special symbols is finished and the losing symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5 second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078 IWS1135 reference). Next, when the 0.5 second symbol determination period ends, the process shifts to a 20 second next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 14-46 (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-46. Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the next change postponement period, right-handed hit notification is started on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-46. Next, when the next change postponement period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color.

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for the losing symbol, and after the symbol determination period has elapsed, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (i.e., the start of the next fluctuation postponement period). (at the start), four jackpot signals may be output. The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next variation postponement period after the symbol confirmation period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure to receive signals externally.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, at the start of the next variation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next variation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that he or she will play right-handed. A test signal or an external output signal indicating this may be output, or a right-handed hit notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed hitting and to notify right-handed hitting at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the feature section 108IW described above, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time reduction, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8 (E)) is uniformly selected and the high-speed variation of 1.5 seconds is changed. Although the case where the display is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving is different will be described below. FIG. 14-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time reduction.

First, using FIG. 14-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the feature section 108IW mentioned above, either the case is a case where the fluctuating display is executed 800 times after the RAM clearing process (without becoming a jackpot or a time saver error), or after a jackpot or a time saver miss (the next jackpot or a time saver miss). 14-8 (F), (G) ) is selected and a variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect, and after the rescue time is shortened and the time saving state is controlled, the variable pattern table E (see figure 1) is uniformly displayed. 14-8(E)) is selected to execute a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds, however, the present invention is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in Modification 2 of FIG. 14-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 fluctuation displays after the RAM clearing process, from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before the rescue time is shortened. also selects fluctuation pattern table B (see Figure 14-7 (B)) and executes the same fluctuation display as normal, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 14-7 (B)) is selected. (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the 5-second variation display may be executed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in Modification 3 in Figure 14-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing 800 fluctuation displays after a jackpot, the fluctuation display when executing the 800th fluctuation display From the pattern table I (see FIG. 14-8 (I)), a variation pattern for relief time saving variation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. Note that the feature section 108IW described above is configured to execute a time-saving rush effect during a variable display, and to execute a mode transition effect and right hit notification during a symbol confirmation period, but for example, during a 25-second variable display. It may be configured so that a mode transition effect or a right hit notification is executed in (Accordingly, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and modification 3 of FIG. 14-47, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that results in a reduction in rescue time is different between the case where the rescue time is shortened after RAM clear processing and the case where the rescue time is shortened after a jackpot. In addition, the effects can be made different by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after transitioning to the time saving state via the rescue time reduction.

For example, as shown in modification example 4 of FIG. 14-47, even if it is from 10 fluctuations ago to 1 fluctuation ago, which shortens the rescue time, the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 14-7 (B)) is selected. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 14-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time saving, and use the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the jackpot. is selected to execute a 5-second fluctuation display at a high rate, and during the time saving state based on the second rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table E (see Figure 14-8 (E)) to display a 1.5-second high-speed display. It may be configured to perform a variation display of variation.

(Example 2)
Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-48 to 14-54. Note that, regarding the second embodiment, mainly the parts that are different from the first embodiment will be explained.

In the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 14-8(F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 14-8(G) are used immediately before the relief time is shortened. No variation pattern table is provided for this purpose. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 14-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time is shortened, the player will not be aware of the fact that the relief time is about to be shortened due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent this from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 14-8(I) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 14-8(J) are used to reduce the relief time. There is no variation pattern table provided for variations when this occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 14-48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 14-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining a variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 14-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the control terminal is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 14-7 and 14-8 will be used (step 100IWS1716).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process in Example 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a caption indicating that the rescue time saving function is provided is displayed (see Figure 14-26). There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time is shortened or that the time for relief is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a telop explaining the reduction in relief time is always displayed in a common manner.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to suggest the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is soon to be shortened, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the caption display is more restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution rate decreases, (or not) is desirable. With this configuration, when the rescue time is shortened, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to the rescue time shortening) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise. You can improve your interest by giving.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure execution settings.

FIG. 14-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-50(A). Further, when it is determined to execute the preview performance, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 14-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened, whether or not the preview effect is executed and the mode of effect when executed are as follows. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Also, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the transition is made to the time saving state C, as in the first embodiment, a background image corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image has an orange display color) (see step 078 IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time-saving control is to be started due to relief time-saving) is suddenly executed, so it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and increase interest. can.

As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close to being shortened. Processing for executing a countdown presentation, effect presentation, and processing for displaying an initial roll according to the number of times until relief time is shortened are omitted.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to perform an inciting effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining is 10 or less), the execution of incitement effects, countdown effects, and effect effects are more restricted than in the previous period (for example, , the execution rate is reduced, or it is not executed at all). With this configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to relief time saving) is suddenly executed, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing interest. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (normal fluctuation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the processing for executing the time-saving rush effect or the time-saving rush effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., notification that time saving control by saving time saving is to be started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 14-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 14-51, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the special symbol variable time ( For example, when 12 seconds) have elapsed, the losing symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, and the losing symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display (see step 100 IWS74, S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time is shortened at the start of the variable display, the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started in the same way as the previous variable display. It ends when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, and when the winning symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period. (See step 100IWS1137). When the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 14-51, the image display device 5 displays a background image (this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated. Further, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-51, during a period in which variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after transitioning to time saving state C, right-handed hit notification is performed (FIG. 14-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production related to the transition to the time-saving state C from becoming complicated, while making the player aware that the player is in a gaming state in which he or she is playing right-handed, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player. can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be explained. FIG. 14-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state. In FIG. 14-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (A), when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the variable display that shortens the relief time, the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 14-52 (B). Then, a decorative pattern 100IW100 and a small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of missed patterns.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed.

In addition, if the pending memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In this case, the background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) may be switched to, and the right hit notification may be executed.

Furthermore, at the timings shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and (C2), an explanation regarding saving time saving by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time saving function and (explanation of the performance) may also be performed. In addition, although the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened and the effects that suggest that the rescue time is near are not executed, the subtitles 100IW103 as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B) are displayed at any timing. may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in Figure 14-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by saving time saving will start) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise and increasing the interest. can be improved.

Further, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the relief time is shortened. Further, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-52. For example, the first modification shown in FIG. 14-53 or the second modification shown in FIG. 14-53 may be used.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 1])
FIG. 14-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2.

In modification example 1 shown in FIG. 14-53, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) is executed that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 14-53 (C), the blackout state is resolved and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are removed and derived by the combination of symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display starts, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 14-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or a sound effect is output to notify that the time saving state (relief time saving) control is to be started. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 14-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in the second modification of the second embodiment.

In modification example 2 shown in FIG. 14-54, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (A), a variable display that shortens the rescue time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time (12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-54(B), on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of broken patterns. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 14-54(B), the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, so the small symbols 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-54(C), on the image display device 5, a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see is performed. executed. Further, the special symbol variation time elapses while the time-saving entry performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed symbols. The time-saving rush performance (blackout performance) continues to be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, the blackout state is resolved in the image display device 5 and the time saving state C ( The background image is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) according to the time saving state (via the rescue time saving state). Further, as shown in FIG. 14-54(D), a right-handed hit notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 14-53 (C), (D), and FIGS. 14-54 (C), (D), relief by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A), (B) is performed. An explanation regarding time saving (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or an effect of saving time saving) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic part 108IW shown above, a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is determined in a period before the relief time becomes short (for example, a period in which the number of remaining variations until a relief variation occurs is 10 or less). , deciding to execute a notice performance is restricted, while in the second embodiment, neither is restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the preview of the type of preview performance for which the expectation level is not very high is determined. The performance may be made executable. That is, it may be possible to limit the determination of a variation pattern that is a super reach, and to restrict the execution of a type of preview performance with a high degree of expectation among the preview performances.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened and the effect that suggests that the relief time is near (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) include an inciting effect, a countdown effect, Effects may be executed, an initial roll will be made according to the number of times until the rescue time is shortened, and a subtitle display while waiting for a customer (for example, subtitle display 108IW101 shown in Figure 14-26) may be displayed. Unlimited. For example, an action effect in which the movable body 32 is operated at any timing during a variable display or while the variation is stopped, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific manner (for example, a rainbow light), and a light emission effect in which the movable body 32 Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of a vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc., it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is almost short.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above, the effect control command (for example, the effect control command to instruct recovery from a power outage or the effect control command to instruct initialization) that is transmitted when the power is turned on. , If the production control board 12 cannot receive the command normally (for example, if a command is missed or a command is garbled), the normal Although it is possible to carry out the effect, it is also possible to not execute the relief suggestion effect that suggests the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near (note that once a jackpot has occurred, possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above, a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, each time a variation display is executed, the command is sent If it is not possible to normally receive the message (given), the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion performance may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specification command could not be received normally, or the relief suggestion effect may not be executed until the next jackpot occurs. The suggestive performance may not be performed. Also, for example, if the reception cannot be received normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in a manner and execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will shorten the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to being shortened). You can. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, although the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variable display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that controls a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning area) in a specific area (V winning area) of the jackpot during a small winning game; The configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on whether the RAM clearing process is executed or when a jackpot occurs, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900", or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be randomly set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C is set every time the relief time saving occurs, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numeric value) that is set when the second time saving time is transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numeric value) that is set when the first time saving time is being saved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same performance (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state after the jackpot and the rescue time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 14-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the effect (variation pattern) is different between the time saving state of the time saving failure and the rescue time saving is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is missed and the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 14-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state when the time saving is missed and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

As described above, the present feature section 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game machine as shown in FIGS. 14-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. When the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in Figure 14-13, the game control As shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), the updating means updates the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-49 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that the special state control will be started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-52 (C1) and (C2)). 14-53 (B), blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 14-54 (C), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 14-54 (C), etc.) The predetermined suggestion performance execution means further includes a performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means, in a period before the special condition is satisfied, The rate at which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 14-50). According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification performance is such that the special notification performance is executed in the display means. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-53(B), it is blacked out at the start of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, a variable display execution means capable of variably displaying identification information for presentation (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is provided. In addition, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing a special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification performance is in a form that makes the performance identification information difficult to see (for example, , blackout occurs at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 14-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification performance is This is a mode in which the background display in the means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in Figure 14-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 14-52 (C1), (C2) ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 14-53 (D) and 14-54 (D), an explanation will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any one of the means 1A to 5A, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variable pattern as shown in FIG. 14-48). When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (usually )), and the special notification performance execution means can execute the special notification performance after a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is also possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when the event is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), a backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means even if the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process that initializes the storage contents of the backup storage means, and the backup storage A recovery means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and. According to such a configuration, while optimizing control through initialization processing, a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when doing so.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can specify that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time saving count counter) that can specify the number of times variable display has been executed in a state, and special status information and execution count information that can be stored even when power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information, and an initialization means (e.g. game control (a part in which the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means has special status information, execution number information, and numerical information stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter are initialized). However, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power cut is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) are disclosed.

(Means 1B) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game machine as shown in FIGS. 14-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a predetermined variable display pattern that is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including specific variable display patterns with long display periods (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14), and the state controlling means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-7). As shown in A) and (B), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined in both cases of jackpot and miss. ), when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the specific variable display pattern is determined at a higher rate than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) have a higher probability of being determined in the event of a jackpot than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), and special conditions are met. In the previous predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, in Figure 14-8 ( As shown in F) and (G), just before the relief time becomes short, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed although variable display is performed using a specific variable display pattern during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown performance, an effect performance, and a caption display while waiting for a customer), and the suggestive performance execution means includes: In the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect is higher than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. ~The part where S809 is executed. Also, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the special condition will be satisfied, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation about the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation is given using the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37(A) and (B)) The explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is capable of executing the preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result. When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of advance notice performances is higher than when the result is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, the remaining number of times until the shortening of the rescue time is 10 or less). 14-31), the percentage of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figure 14-31). , the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 14-32(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, a performance mode "red") and a predetermined display mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. If the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than that of the predetermined mode. If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result during the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the proportion of execution of preview effects is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A; see FIGS. 14-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed in a specific manner during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C) are disclosed.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game machine as shown in FIGS. 14-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including , the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17. (for example, the part that executes the variable display of the second identification information), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the first identification information is displayed variably or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means (the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In this case, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display using the special variable display pattern is executed. A specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance to notify that the special state is being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, executing step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100) part. 14-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification performance execution means executes the specific notification performance when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a variable display is executed in which the special conditions are met and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is displayed after performing a production in a manner common to the specific notification production. A special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance that notifies that the is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. 41 (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, he or she is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which can provide surprise to the player and improve interest. I can do it.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the execution is not performed before the special condition is satisfied. It is provided with a predetermined notification performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification performance (for example, a full rotation performance) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the same aspect as before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, there is a fluctuation This is realized by determining pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135; see FIG. 14-36), the special condition is satisfied. During the display period of the display result of the variable display when As shown, the production control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing step 100IWS847. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification performance in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the performance when switching the gaming state, and to improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. and, after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means that outputs a special signal (for example, jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 14-18). According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to be received externally.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. ), outputs a special signal. According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to occur externally.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control (where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game media should be ejected toward a special path (for example, during a gaming state in which the player is assumed to play right-handed). a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a right-hand ball is being played, and a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a player is in a right-hand hitting state; The second starting condition is established based on the passing of the game medium through the second passing area, and the special output means is configured to display the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 14-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that game media should be ejected toward a special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1D) to (means 5D) are disclosed.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game machine as shown in FIGS. 14-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means that can update numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); and a variable means that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. display pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-48); By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of display execution times, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is satisfied. After a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, a special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to shortening rescue time It further includes a special notification performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) capable of executing the display (orange). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is satisfied. Further, it is possible to use a variable display pattern in common between when the special condition is satisfied and before the special condition is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer or a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) in which a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means is a notice target, the read-ahead notice execution means comprising: Among the variable displays corresponding to pending information stored before the special condition is met, it is possible to perform a look-ahead preview effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is met, while the variable display that the special condition is met can be executed. Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays subsequent to the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the performance.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and executes the special notification performance. This is a mode in which the background display on the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 14-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the player by providing surprise to the player, and it is also possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any one of the means 1D to 3D includes a means for executing a suggestive effect that can execute a suggestive effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a caption display while waiting for a customer, etc.) The suggestive effect execution means limits execution of the suggestive effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to 4D, an explanatory effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 14-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 14-53 (D) and 14-54 (D), explanations are provided using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) are disclosed.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 includes a part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. , it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a microcomputer for game control 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). (See Figure 14-7 (C) and Figure 14-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate at which the variable display is executed increases due to the shortened variable display pattern, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is increased. Since the time period will be shortened, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern that corresponds to the execution of the reach effect. (For example, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) The microcomputer 100 includes a part for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537) can be controlled to a special state after being controlled by the updating means, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. (See Figure 14-7 (C) and Figure 14-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the proportion of display results of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern becoming non-specific display results is low, so that a decrease in interest is prevented. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means is capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638 in the production control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or 2E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a holding storage means (for example, a first holding memory number buffer and a second holding memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. , a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means; The method determines the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and which pre-reading notice among the plurality of types. The rate at which the performance is executed is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, the portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 14-28(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of pre-read preview performance can be determined between the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established. It can be made different and more interesting.

(Means 4E) In any one of the means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a step A part that executes S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice performance (for example, a chance effect or a pending change effect) in which the variable display corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending storage means is the subject of the notice, The look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect that targets a variable display when the special condition is met among the variable displays corresponding to the pending information stored before the special condition is met; Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control processing, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation contents.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown in (means 1a) to (means 10a) shown below are disclosed.

(Means 1a) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game machine as shown in FIGS. 14-17). Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

In addition, although this example shows a case where an initial value is set in the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not give time savings, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time savings counter is not set. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the first special symbol mainly changes in the normal state, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as a display result of the variable display ( For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 100). According to such a configuration, relief is provided when display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., variable probability state, time saving state) (e.g., FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so it is possible to control the special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. , Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Note that this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated on a low probability low base (normal state), a high probability high base (variable probability state), and a low probability high base (time saving state). It is not limited to the form. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probable variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), and high probability low base (latent probability variable). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine that executes a lottery in which a probability change state falls to a normal state.

Although this example shows a case where the second special symbol is given priority, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first starting winning hole, and a high probability low base (small winning RUSH) where small wins occur frequently is provided, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the winning order of game balls. It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

Although this example shows a case where a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, only the first special symbol may be provided.

(Means 4a) In any of the means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, a microcomputer for game control 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 14-17. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) is configured. may have been done. According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (e.g., time saving error) is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 14 As shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, The part that executes step 100IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming more intense than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) In the means 4a, when the power supply is stopped, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information to be updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held in the backup storage means is set to an initial value (for example, as shown in Figure 14-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained when initialization is performed at the gaming parlor, it may be too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means can control the special state for a specific period of more than the special number of times based on the variable display of the special number of times being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 14-47). The portion shown in Example 4) may also be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation where the control is not in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so it is necessary to take measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display. By changing the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

(Means 10a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means can control the special state for a specific period of more than the special number of times based on the variable display of the special number of times being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes the common production in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100). (portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the situation is such that it has not been controlled to be in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by intentionally executing the same performance, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being more aware of the uncontrolled situation than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and a gaming area that can play game media separately into a first route (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route); State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIGS. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an updating means that can update numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the game that is necessary to execute multiple types of processing including variable display control and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating the progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control to the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13). 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100); Numerical information is updated depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the microcomputer 100 for game control (For example, as shown in FIG. S110 to S113), when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100) In the normal state, the game is played by ejecting the game media to the first path, and in the special state, A game is played by firing game media into the second route, and firing promotion notification means (see Figure 14-46) executes firing promotion notification to the effect that the game media should be fired to the second route during execution of the third process. ). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and a variable display is executed. (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control. Process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part of the microcomputer 100 that executes step S25), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100) 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process regarding variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100). 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes the second process regarding the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) 5, when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means establishes the special condition. The third process for controlling the original special state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state is changed during the execution of the third process. The present invention is characterized in that it includes a performance execution means (see FIG. 14-46) that performs a notification performance to notify that the control is being performed. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

Although this example shows a case where priority is given to processing related to jackpots, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration may be such that priority is given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In addition, although this example shows a case where a right hit is notified in the next fluctuation postponement process which is the third process, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the configuration may be such that only a mode transition effect suggesting a shift to a time saving state is executed without giving a right-handed hit notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the processing execution means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed). According to such a configuration, priority is given to controlling the advantageous state, so that no disadvantageous result is produced for the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, the means 1b-2, or the means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, for game control The processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the microcomputer 100). 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 14-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) The means 3b includes a variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, and The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is different when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. (the part that executes) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the finalization time of the display result is different depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-15, (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130). According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1c) to (means 6c) are disclosed.

(Means 1c) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and the variable display is executed. The update means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13) that can update the numerical information based on the above information, and the state controlled by the state control means. a state information control means for controlling specifiable state information, the state control means being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and then changing to a special state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-12, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17) (in the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means updates the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes steps 100IWS145 and 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is " 0''), the state information is set to the second numerical value when the control is performed to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, As shown in 19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), and the special condition is established. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part, that is, the time saving flag C is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and when in a special state, the state It is possible to transmit specific information depending on whether the information is a second numerical value or a third numerical value (for example, as shown in Figure 14-10, as shown in Figure 14-19, The part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

Although this example shows a case where a time-saving state A designation command and a time-saving state C designation command are transmitted as the specific information, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that allows it to be specified that the user is in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time reduction loss, or a time saving state via a relief time reduction. Good too. For example, when a jackpot occurs, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) and a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) are transmitted in different ways depending on the gaming state, and depending on which command is received, The fanfare period and ending period may be configured to change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is established again after the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, the status information control means changes the status information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed, and when the state control means realizes that the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that a different effect can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what has happened (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when a special condition is established, so it is possible to execute a performance according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the special state when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result; It is possible to execute a common effect when controlling to a special state based on the fulfillment of a condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and this prevents an increase in development costs because new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result (for example, time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the production control means, based on the state control means deriving and displaying the special display result. Different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 100IWS636, The part that executes S638) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when special conditions are established, so it is possible to perform effects according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any one of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means: When the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, It may be configured such that the performance can be executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and this prevents an increase in development costs because new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1d) to (means 4d) are disclosed.

(Means 1d) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and the variable display is executed. An updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above, and when the power supply is stopped, The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of execution times of the variable display, and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When a condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17) , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The game control means updates the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means uses predetermined information for effect control when power supply is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the performance control means can supply power based on receiving the predetermined information. It is characterized by being able to execute a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display during a predetermined period after the start of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the effect control CPU 120). do. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, players are motivated to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, and the operating rate of the gaming machines can be increased.

Note that in this example, the initial roll is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform a background change, a fluctuating effect up to 100 revolutions, and a suggestive effect by displaying on a demo screen or menu screen.

In addition, when transmitting the command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 14-12), the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify numerical information held by the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, in FIG. As shown in 14-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Note that although this example shows a case where a command that can specify the value of the rescue time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, sending a command that can specify a predetermined range, such as specifying 1 to 99 rotations in units of 100 rotations, specifying 100 to 199 rotations, specifying 500 to 599 rotations, etc. It may be configured such that when the time saving number counter value is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but when the value is 127 or less, a command that can be specified is transmitted.

(Means 3d) In the means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of special conditions based on specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the production control CPU 120) can specify, as specific information, that the difference between the number of executions of variable display and the special number of times is less than a predetermined value. First specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, a command specifying the number of rescue time reduction times 1) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses and to suitably implement processing related to specific information.

Note that this example shows a case where the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that the second specifying information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is not transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to 3d, the production control means is controlled to be in a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the first predetermined number of variable displays being executed, which is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the performance control CPU 120, )), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect each time a second predetermined number of variable displays smaller than the first predetermined number of times is performed before a special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the performance control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) to 14-38 (F)). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses.

Note that although this example shows a case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the rescue time reduction number counter.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) are disclosed.

(Means 1e-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17). As shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and an update means that can update numerical information based on the state of the power supply when the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; There is a difference between when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the storage means are initialized and then controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition, and when it is controlled to a special state at . It is characterized by executing effects (for example, the portions shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 14-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-17). As shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and an update means that can update numerical information based on the state of the power supply when the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; After the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, the portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 in FIG. 14-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case after a jackpot.

Note that the configurations of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to this feature section 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed. A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means controlling the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a corresponding specific value, and the updating means can be controlled to a special state when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where a variable display of the second identification information is executed. There are multiple types of advantageous states, including specific advantageous states and special advantageous states, and depending on which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled, the numerical information is updated. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. The degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is set as a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is set as a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after a fixed variable time reduction is set as after a normal jackpot. It may be configured such that the advantage is higher than the time saving state of , and the time saving state of relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state after a normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is controlled when the variable display of the first identification information triggers the advantageous state and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers the control into the advantageous state. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and 800 times, which is the condition that the relief time is controlled to be shortened when controlled to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol and when controlled to be a jackpot based on the second special symbol. The structure may be configured so that the number of fluctuations is the same.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") reduces the number of fluctuations, which is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time, than setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). However, it is only necessary to configure the advantageous degree in saving time to be higher than the advantageous degree in the time-saving state after the jackpot. Note that the rescue time reduction achievement rate is higher when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"); Since the number of times is 800 (substantially until the next jackpot), it may be more advantageous than the time-saving state via a jackpot (for example, the number of time-savings is usually 100 after a jackpot).

(Means 4f) Any one of the means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. The structure may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5f) When any of the means 1f to 4f is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of the means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 14-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) Any one of the means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7f is based on, for example, a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 14-8(E).

(Means 8f) In any of the means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a start condition established when a start condition is satisfied. a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on a start condition; a hold storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when a start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup storage means capable of retaining numerical information and pending information; an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met; and power supply is started. and a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the pending information stored in the pending storage means based on the storage contents of the backup storage device, and the state control device includes: , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can be controlled to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the control by initialization while suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization processing, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when recovering from a power outage, the Restore the relief time reduction counter and pending memory, and configure the system so that when the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of recovery reaches the 800th variation and the conditions for the relief time reduction control are met, the relief time reduction control becomes possible. Bye.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, an advantageous state is achieved when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and the variation that becomes the condition for controlling the relief time to be shortened depending on when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of times is the same.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or 2g, there is an unfavorable setting value in which the probability of being controlled into an advantageous state is a first probability, and an advantageous setting where the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") will reduce the number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened, and will shorten the rescue time, compared to setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). What is necessary is to configure the advantageous degree of this to be higher than the advantageous degree of the time saving state after the jackpot. Note that setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of failure than setting an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so it is easier to save time. ,Relief time saving is always 800 time saving times (substantially until the next jackpot), so it is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot (for example, usually after the jackpot, the time saving number is 100 times). Good too.

(Means 4b) Any one of the means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. The structure may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5g) When any of the means 1g to 4g is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5g, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of the means 1g to 5g, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) Any one of the means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7g is based on, for example, a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 14-8(E).

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, the state control means comprising an update means. The numerical information updated by the first identification information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means The system further includes a suggestion performance execution means capable of updating the numerical information depending on whether the display is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a suggestion production related to the establishment of the special condition. In the execution means, the ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes is used to execute the suggestion effect varies depending on the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. This is the mode of doing so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h, for example, it is necessary to decide whether or not to execute a countdown effect that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time. The ratio may be configured to change according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the performance mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is such that the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown performance in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect that displays a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and in which mode it is displayed. The period until the suggested special conditions come into effect differs depending on whether the special conditions are met. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of a specific image and improve interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer and the presentation mode, using the table shown in FIG. 14-25, for example. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counting down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to 3h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestive effects are executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration that uses, for example, a table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to 4h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIGS. 14-25 is used to determine the performance mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to 5h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. display means, and the suggestive performance execution means detects that the operation means has been operated or that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to a player who actually plays a game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 6h, for example, when the game machine shifts to the demonstration state, the game ball is activated by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the starting port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) Any of the means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 7h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer.

(Means 8h) Any one of the means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 8h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIGS. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer, and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and Setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggested setting suggestion performance; The effect executing means has the same rate of executing the suggested effect regardless of the setting value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is being executed, and it is also possible to suppress complexity of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the set value (for example, a performance that has different execution rates depending on the set value), it is also possible to display a caption while waiting for a customer regardless of which set value is set. The configuration may be configured so that the ratio is the same.

(Means 10h) Any one of the means 1h to 6h and the means 9h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance suggesting a setting value, and the setting suggestion performance execution means executes a setting suggestion performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different, and the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is the same depending on the specific mode, regardless of the set value of the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestive performance, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests a setting value (for example, a performance with different execution rates depending on the setting value), it is also possible to execute a performance that indicates a setting value, while waiting for customers in a red performance mode regardless of which setting value is set. The configuration may be such that the execution rate of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means determines whether the power supply is performed depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed during a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution rate of the ticker display and countdown effect while waiting for a customer is different after the initialization process and after the power outage recovery. You can configure it like this.

(Means 12h) Any one of the means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured to When the special variable display pattern is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special condition is satisfied, and the special state is set when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed. The device further includes a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance for notifying that the device is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and also to clearly inform the player of the change in the gaming state, and to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on a configuration using a pattern table for relief time saving fluctuation failure shown in FIG. 14-8(I), for example.

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. Yes, when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is longer than the predetermined period. Compared to the previous period, when the display result of variable display does not result in a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 14-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any one of the means 1h to 13h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means can execute the preview effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result does not become a specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than in the case where no specific display result is obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met is higher than the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing preview effects is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration in which, for example, a table shown in FIG. 14-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview effect.

(Means 15h) Any one of the means 1h to 14h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means is capable of executing the preview effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result, and the display of the variable display When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of preview effects executed in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview performance depending on the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 11... Main board 12... Performance control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
A control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
The display means is
A specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A grant amount display regarding the grant amount of gaming value can be displayed on the front side of the specific display,
On the front side of the specific display, a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display is displayed when the amount of gaming value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount. A second notification display that is displayed, and a second notification display that is displayed.
The grant amount display is a display that continues to be displayed even after a specific period of time has passed from the start of the display,
The notification display is a display that ends after the specified period of time has elapsed from the start of the display,
The text display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the text display included in the provision amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character display is formed;
The specific display is not visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the provision amount display,
The specific display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display included in the notification display,
The display means is
Start displaying the award amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first round game among the plurality of round games is started and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. ,
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed without displaying the predetermined display at the start of the award amount display,
A gaming machine characterized in that the notification display is displayed when the award amount display is displayed.

Images